100% found this document useful (1 vote)

7K views316 pages

Manual Operare Bizerba en

Retail scale BC II Basic Class II operating instructions from program version 2. 6.111.98.5.01 en Alle Rechte vorbehalten Tous droits réservés Tutti I diritti riservati Translation of original operating instructions Chapter index About these instructions About the device Installation device and operating controls Operation Programming troubleshooting maintenance technical data Subject index Safety instructions operating instruction BC II List of contents List of contents 1 Page About these instructions.

Uploaded by

Dragos Manole

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

7K views316 pages

Manual Operare Bizerba en

Uploaded by

Dragos Manole

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 316

Retail scale BC II

Basic Class II
Operating instructions
from program version 2..20
6.111.98.5.01.13 en

Alle Rechte vorbehalten

06 / 2011
Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG,
72336 Balingen
Postfach 10 01 64
72301 Balingen/Germany,
Tel. (+49 7433) 12-0, Fax (+49 7433) 12-2696
e-mail:
[email protected]
Internet: http://www.bizerba.com

Translation of original operating instructions

6.111.98.5.01.13

Chapter index
About these instructions
About the device

1
2

Installation

3
4

Device and operating controls

Operation

Programming

Troubleshooting

Maintenance

Technical data

Subject index

Safety instructions

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

List of contents

List of contents
1

Page

About these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

1.1

Safe-keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

1.2

Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

1.3

Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

1.4

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

2.1

Device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

2.2

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

2.3

Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

2.4

Designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

2.5

Verification information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

2.6

Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

2.7
2.7.1

Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

5
6

2.8

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

2.9

Disposal of devices/environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

3.1

Requirements on the operating personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

3.2

Device signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

3.3

Sources of risk related to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

4.1

Transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4

Installation and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conditions for the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assemble the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the electric connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of customer's power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of scale network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
1
1
2
3
3
4
5

4.2.5

6.111.98.5.01.13

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

0-1

List of contents

Operating instruction BC II
Page

4.2.6

Rechargeable battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Operation with rechargeable batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Battery icon display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

6
6
7

4.3
4.3.1

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Switch on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

8
8

4.4

Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

Device and operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -

5.1

Main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -

5.2
5.2.1

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Display icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -

2
2

5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4

Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Membrane keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5
5
5
5
5

3
3
4
4
7

5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4

Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the thermal print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ticket printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5
5
5
5
5

8
8
- 10
- 11
- 12

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

6.1

Switching on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

6.2

Switch off device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

6.3

Zerosetting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7

Operating options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Price labeling with manual triggering * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Price labeling with automatic start * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piece price multi- label printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed weight label multi-printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

6.5
6.5.1

Unit price input via 10-key keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . 6 -

9
9

6.6

Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

6.7

Scroll function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12

6.8

Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13

0-2

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

List of contents
Page

6.9

Subtotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13

6.10

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13

6.11
6.11.1
6.11.2

Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up PLUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator sales with PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overwrite PLU unit price. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces
Register manual weight input ( depending on country) . . . . . . . . .

6
6
6
6
6
6
6

14
14
16
16
16
16
17

6.12
6.12.1

Tare functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare balancing for unknown tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unknown tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batch tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare balancing for known tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save tare value weighed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save tare value entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call up operator tare saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

18
18
18
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
22
23

6.12.2

6.12.3

6.13

Assisted sales with ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 24

6.14

Talon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25

6.15

Print ticket upon request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25

6.16

Repeat ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26

6.17
6.17.1
6.17.2
6.17.3

Open ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Open the last ticket via the operator key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open the ticket via ticket number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overwrite VAT from PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.18

Serviced selling with label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29

6.19

By Count article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30

6.20

Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 35

6.21

By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 39

6.22

Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 44

6.23
6.23.1
6.23.2

Product with data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45

Sale with manual input of the traceability number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45
Sale with fixed traceability number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46

6.111.98.5.01.13

6
6
6
6

26
27
27
28

0-3

List of contents

Operating instruction BC II
Page

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

7.1

Initial display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

7.2

Menu password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

7.3

Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 General programming sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

2
2

7.4

Initial scale setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.5.7
7.5.8
7.5.9

Overview of list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU direct keys
..................................
Barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLD labels
........................................
Logos
...............................................
VAT rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
8

7.6

General procedure for text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

7.7

Overview of scrolling messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14

7.8

Barcode overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manufacturer code WAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instore code EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.9

Traceability marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29

7.10

Overview of By Count article definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30

Create By Count piece goods in a PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31

7.11

Create overview of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32

7.12

Overview of By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33

7.13
7.13.1

Overview VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34
Assign VAT to PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35

7.14

Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00) . . . 7 - 36

0-4

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

7
7
7
7

15
17
18
23

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

List of contents
Page

7.15
7.15.1

7.15.2
7.15.3
7.15.4
7.16
7.16.1
7.16.2
7.16.3
7.16.4
7.16.5

7.16.6

7.16.7

PLU maintenance menu Pr 1-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create PLU (article)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110 .
Unit price input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode for article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Price overwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Article type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU article text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplementary text 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplementary text 1 - -10 for BLD text fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logo print in BLD logo fields
.............................
By Count: Piece per package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight . . . . . .
By Count: Mandatory input of pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By Count: Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By Count: Fixed weight mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mandatory input of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT can be overwritten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare % (dependent on country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print PLU (article) lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 115 .
Delete PLU (article) individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 120 .
Delete PLU (article) from - to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 121 .

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

39
40
41
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
49
50
51
51

Data maintenance Menu Pr 2-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Define supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 200 .
Create header and footer notes text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 201 .
Create text of scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 202 .
Print texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 205 .
Delete supplementary texts amd header/foot texts . . . Pr 206 .
Delete supplementary text individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete all supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete scrolling message texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 210 .
Create barcode format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter code constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select numeric code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check and adopt code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administer barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211 .

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

52
52
53
54
55
56
56
56
56
57
58
58
59
59
61
62

6.111.98.5.01.13

0-5

List of contents

Operating instruction BC II
Page

7.16.8

7.16.9
7.16.10

7.16.11

7.16.12

7.17
7.17.1
7.17.2

7.17.3
7.17.4

7.18
7.18.1

0-6

Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 215 .

Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . . . . . . . .
Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) . . . . .
Barcode for non-PLU minus article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode for total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product groups for non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)
Product groups for non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) . . . . . . . . .
VAT for Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLD label list / print logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr220 .
Print BLD label list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete BLD labels / logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 225 .
Delete BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete BLD logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 230 .
Define VAT rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incl. or excl. VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 231 .
Printing VAT list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting VAT number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Same VAT for all articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

64
64
65
65
65
65
66
66
66
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
69
69
69
70
70
70
71
71
71
71

Reports menu Pr 3-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configure report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300 .
Print reports on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr310 .
Scale report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU report with one product text line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU report with all article text lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product group report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text line . . . .
Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text lines . . . .
VAT sales report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print report on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr311 .
Display / delete sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr320 .
Display sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

72
72
74
74
75
75
76
77
77
78
79
79
80
80
80

Device Configuration Menu Pr 5-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr500 .
Setting date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print year number with either 2 or 4 digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7
7
7
7
7
7

81
81
82
82
82
83

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

List of contents
Page

7.18.2
7.18.3

7.18.4

7.18.5

7.18.6

7.18.7

7.18.8
7.18.9
7.18.10
7.18.11

Select type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 505 .

Setting main operating mode
Pr 510 .
Select main operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 511 .
Select switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for different operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 515 .
Automatic zerosetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open tickets / labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traceability marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define traceability number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sales calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compulsory entry for By Count pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compulsory entry for fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling message settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 516 .
Select scrolling message no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select display location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activate scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for multi-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 520 .
Constant key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print article and total label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator items display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cash functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Payment in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Talon print-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print cancellation and canceled articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing included VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print ticket if requested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for multi-operator mode
Pr 521 .
Settings for price labeling mode * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 525 .
Labeling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piece price multiple label printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure operator keys with operator no. . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 530 .
PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 535 .
10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU entry: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. . . . . .
PLU direct key mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU direct key allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay time PLU no. input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating instruction BC II

List of contents
Page

7.21.18

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting . . . . . . . Pr 695 . 7 - 151

Change main currency to second currency (Euro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 151
Convert PLU price into EURO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 151

7.22
7.22.1
7.22.2
7.22.3
7.22.4
7.22.5
7.22.6

7.22.10
7.22.11
7.22.12

Service menu Pr 7-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700 .
Print boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701 .
Print fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 702 .
Print menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 703 .
Print weighing system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 704 .
Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710 .
Feed for labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move print format on the label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct ticket feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change printing intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712 .
Display load cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 715 .
Display program version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 716 .
Main program version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bootloader version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Font resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 717 .
Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718 .
Logbook control
Pr 730 .

7.23

Programming overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 163

7.22.7
7.22.8
7.22.9

6.111.98.5.01.13

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

152
152
152
153
153
154
155
155
155
156
156
156
157
157
158
158
158
158
158
158
158
158
158
158
159
160
160

0 - 11

List of contents

Operating instruction BC II
Page

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -

8.1

Fault description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -

8.2

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -

9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3

Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning

.................................................
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
products for printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
9
9
9

1
1
2
4

9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the weight display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note on storing thermal paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ticket, label and Linerless rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
9
9
9

6
6
6
6

10 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -

10.1

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -

10.2

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -

10.3

Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Threshold values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -

2
2

Subject index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -

Appendix
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN
eurofins Certificate modas BWLC-V2

0 - 12

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

About these instructions

Read through the operating manual carefully before connecting and switching on the
device to ensure that you fully utilize the quality and possibilities of application this device
offers.
This operating manual explains how to operate and set the device.
It also includes functions that are only required by Bizerba Service. Contact your Bizerba
technical consultant if necessary.
Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific
regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the instructions may differ from the supplied
version.

1.1

Safe-keeping

This operating manual is an integral part of the device and must be kept next to it, easily
accessible for all personnel.
If the device is resold, the complete operating manual must be provided with it.

1.2

Target group

The device may only be operated by trained personnel. This means that the operator must
be familiar with the contents of this operating manual.
Installation, servicing and repairs may only be performed by qualified personnel authorized
by Bizerba.

6.111.98.5.01.13

1-1

About these instructions

1.3

Operating instruction BC II

Symbols used

Various symbols are used in these instructions.

Symbol

Meaning
Text with arrow prompts you to carry out an action.
Key symbols prompt you to press this key on

Mod

Key symbols with a + prompt you to keep the 1st key held down while
you press the second key.

Position numbers in figures.

<Key>

Text within < > describes a key.

Display

Text within indicates the display text.

Notes
_______________________________________________________________________
Observance of these notes is mandatory.
_______________________________________________________________________

Information
_______________________________________________________________________
This information is provided for greater understanding.
_______________________________________________________________________

Menu settings
Prerequisites and menu settings for functions or rules are highlighted in gray.
Menu settings are the prerequisites for descriptions or operation procedures.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ 06 -1

Price overwrite permitted

Syntax: Pr 110/ 06 -1
Pr 110
Program number 110
/ 06
Submenu 06
-1
Setting 1

1-2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

1.4

About these instructions

Warnings

Warnings are divided into danger levels by the signal word.

Signal word
Symbol

Meaning

_______________________________________________________________________
DANGER

Source of danger with high risk with imminent danger for

personnel!
The consequences are:
- critical injuries
- severe damage to health
Measures to avoid the danger are specified.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING

Source of danger with medium risk with potentially threatening

danger for personnel!
The consequences can be:
- serious injuries
- damage to health
- serious damage to property
Measures to avoid the danger are specified.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION

Source of danger with low risk with potentially threatening

danger for personnel!
The consequences can be:
- Injuries
- Damage to property
Measures to avoid the danger are specified.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION

Source of danger, improper use!

Damage to property can result.
Measures to avoid the danger are specified.

_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

1-3

About these instructions

Operating instruction BC II

1-4

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Device

2.1

Device types

About the device

The BC II device type is available with either a thermal ticket printer or a label printer.
T = Thermal ticket printer
E = Label printer
BC II 800 T
BC II 800 E

Fig. 1: BC II 800
BC II 100 T
BC II 100 E

Fig. 2: BC II 100
BC II 200 T
BC II 200 E

Fig. 3: BC II 200

2.2

Accessories

We offer a comprehensive accessories program for the device. Please contact your
Bizerba technical consultant for further information.

2.3

Intended use

The BC II scale is particularly suitable for counter sales, quick and self-service, as well as
manual price labeling and simple cash reg. (POS) functions. Use devices only for intended
use.

6.111.98.5.01.13

2-1

About the device

2.4

Operating instruction BC II

Designation label

Designation label of a verified scale.

BC II 800

Fig. 4: Explanations of the individual labels:

Explanations of the individual labels:

11147xxxxx

Designation label no.

CE 07

CE certification with the last two digits of the year in which the
CE certification was applied.

0103

Identification number of the appointed body Verification Ma

nagement - Stuttgart

D07-09-014

No. of EC type approval

M
BIZERBA

green square symbol (sign for EC-first verification)

Manufacturer
Note on recommended battery change - the battery in the
CPU unit should be replaced by Bizerba Customer Service in
the year printed on the label. A defective battery can result in
the loss of saved data.

BCII

Type designation (basic type)

Nr./No.

Device No.

Max 6 kg

Maximum load Max

Min 20 g

Minimum load Min

e=2g

Verification value , e

T= - 6 kg

Subtractive tare maximum load T= -

MADE BY BIZERBA

Manufacturer

120-240V 0.2-0.1A
50/60Hz

Electrical data
Scale accuracy class III

2-2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

2.5

About the device

Verification information

Verification information for EC countries

The green M (sign for EC-first verification) is on the designation label of the scale. This
type of scale can be put into operation and used on site provided that it is not connected to
an additional device, e.g. cash register or printer.
Scales that are connected on site to an additional device (e.g. cash register or printer)
must have their first verification carried out either by the responsible verification office or
by a verification officer from Bizerba. Scales as well as the additional device (e.g. cash
register) must be tested and verified. If the scale fulfills the verification specifications with
their additional device, it can be used in legal for trade applications. In the case of
extensions at a later date, once the scale has already been put into operation, the relevant
verification office must be informed.
Scales and additional devices without the CE mark may not be used in legal for trade
operations.
Scales that are verified to a specific verification zone (acceleration of fall) (details are
given on the designation label) may not be used in other verification zones without being
reverified.
According to statutory regulations, the user of a scale must ensure that it is used for its
intended purpose. This includes observation of the verification guidelines, in particular
amendments, supplements and additions.
Reverification information
Reverification of scales is executed according to the respective statutory country
regulations. The verification validity period in Germany for example, for scales is usually 2
years. Price labeling scales have a verification validity period of 1 year. The verification
validity period begins when the scales are put into circulation (installation and
commissioning). Please refer here to the designation label (in the present example, 2007,
as the designation is CE 07).
Verification information for non-EU countries
The statutory regulations of the specific countries must be observed.

_______________________________________________________________________
A yellow mark of conformity is affixed to the load receptor of the
scale, with the inscription Verified by BIZERBA (first verification by
Bizerba). Reverifications must be carried out by the operator of the
scale according to the legal requirements.
_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

2-3

About the device

2.6

Operating instruction BC II

Standards and guidelines

The equipment fulfils the following requirements:

Measuring technology
Directive 90/384/EEC

scales guidelines nonautomatic scales

OIML R76-Ed. 2006

Organisation internationale de mtrologie lgale

Nonautomatic weighing instruments

DIN EN 45501

Metrological aspects of nonautomatic scales

OIML R60

Metrological regulation for load cells

WELMEC 2.3

Guideline for software testing

Handbook 44

Specifications, tolerances and other technical require

ments for weighing and measuring devices (USA)

Publication 14

Weighing devices, Checklist, Test procedures

(USA)Weights and Measures Act (Canada)

Electromagnetic compatibility
Directive 2004/108/ EC

EMC-guideline

DIN EN 61000-6-1/ 2007-10

interference resistance
Residential, commercial and light industry

DIN EN 61000-6-3/ 2007-09

emitted interference
Residential, commercial and light industry

DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10

Harmonics current

DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06

Voltage fluctuations and flickers

GB 9254-1998

Information Technology Equipment - Radio Disturbance

Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement

Electrical safety
Directive 2006/ 95 EC

Low voltage guideline

IEC 60950-1/ 2001

Information technology equipment - Safety

DIN EN 60950-1/ 2006-11

Information technology equipment - Safety

UL 60950-1/ 2006-07

Information technology equipment - Safety

DIN EN 60529/ 2000-09

Protection types provided by housing (IP code)

2-4

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

2.7

About the device

Operating conditions

Do not install or commission equipment until the operating conditions have been fulfilled.

Temperature and air humidity:

The permitted values and class of protection are found on the designation label on the
device and on page 10 - 2.

Installation area
A flat, vibration-free position as well as the driest possible installation must be
guaranteed for our equipment.
Vibrations can affect measurements made by the scales.

Align horizontally
To ensure the precision of the sales, it is of absolute necessity that the device is
aligned horizontally.

Draft
Drafts can affect the measurements made by the scales.

Air convection
Free air convection must be able to form around the device in order to avoid
inadmissible heating.

Supply voltage
The permitted values can be found on the designation label on the device - and
see page 10 - 2.

Trained personnel:
Only trained personnel can maximize the performance of the device and avoid risks.

Written consent for modifications:

Modifications to the devices require our prior written consent. External data dialog
between Bizerba equipment and other manufacturers' equipment, the hardware and
software required, test and modification work, must be clarified with us in writing.

Please contact us or our competent customer service points if you have any doubts
regarding the practical application of these conditions.
For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective
manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.

6.111.98.5.01.13

2-5

About the device

2.7.1

Operating instruction BC II

Power supply

The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must be
carried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derived
from them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the following
commissions:
-

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)

Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)

Our units are built to VDE protection class I and must be connected to a protective
conductor.
Interference suppression measures
If the mains power supply is subject to electric interference, interference suppression
measures must be taken on site, e.g.:
-

provision of separate mains cable to our equipment.

in problem cases, insertion of capacitively decoupled isolating transformers or other

suppressors into the mains supply lines to our equipment.

2-6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

2.8

About the device

Warranty

Installation, commissioning and initial training must be carried out by trained staff from our
sales offices and customer service points or by companies authorized by us.
We do not accept any liability for damages resulting from:
-

Non-compliance with our operating conditions and operating manual.

Defective electrical installation by the customer.

Structural changes to our equipment.

Removal of verification seals and fuse stamps.

Incorrect programming and operation.

Natural wear and tear..

The warranty will lapse if defects/damage occur as a result of interventions by persons we

have not authorized or the use of non-Bizerba genuine spare parts.
If you reset or program devices, check the new setting with a test run and test printout.
This helps to avoid faulty results.
Only trained staff may operate the equipment.
Check that our products are handled correctly and repeat training if necessary.
Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific
regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the operating manual may differ from the
supplied version.

2.9

Disposal of devices/environmental protection

_______________________________________________________________________
Only applies to Germany!
_______________________________________________________________________
This device includes batteries which are subject to the Batteries Act concerning return and
disposal of used batteries and accumulators.
This act holds you as the end user responsible to return the device to the manufacturer or
its distributor for the purpose of recycling and proper disposal after the end of its intended
use.
Bizerba and its distributors are ready to except the returns of your old devices which are
no longer operated.
In these instances, please, contact your Bizerba specialist in charge.
If the device includes a chargeable battery pack, according to the Battery Act you are
responsible to return used battery packs to the distributor or to return locations which are
provided to the public.
Of course, Bizerba and its distributors will also accept your used battery packs.

6.111.98.5.01.13

2-7

About the device

Operating instruction BC II

2-8

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Safety instructions

The safety instructions must be observed throughout the installation, operation,

cleaning and maintenance procedures.

3.1

Requirements on the operating personnel

The device may only be operated by people who have been instructed in the operating
procedure. The operating personnel must read and understand the safety instructions in
this Operating Manual.
Please pay special attention to and memorize all safety and hazard information!
Carry out regular training!
Operators (purchasers) as well as supervisory and operating staff must carry out
programming and data protection on our systems and equipment exclusively in
accordance with our operating and programming instructions.
Only use equipment for its intended purpose.

3.2

Device signs

Remove the mains plug from the socket

Fig. 5: Remove the mains plug from the socket

6.111.98.5.01.13

3-1

Safety instructions

3.3

Operating instruction BC II

Sources of risk related to the system

_______________________________________________________________________

For safety reasons, shut equipment down immediately in the event of

recurring faults, damage of any type, and suspicion of risk of injury.
Always inform the nearest customer service point.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Check before mains connection
Before connecting the device, check
-

the power supply data on the designation label

the power supply data of the mains supply

_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING

Incorrect supply voltage !

Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire.
-

Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power

supply data do not match the connection values of the scale.
The power supply data must be identical.

Inform Bizerba Customer Service.

_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION

Voltage at switched-off scale!

Even when the scale is switched off, the scale electronics is live.

Remove the AC power plug to disconnect from the mains.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING

Opening the device!

Electric shock.
-

The device may only be opened by trained and qualified Bizerba

personnel.

_______________________________________________________________________

3-2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Installation

4.1

Transport and storage

Installation

Always transport and store the device in the original packaging

4
4.2

Installation and assembly

Installation, first commissioning, adjustment, initial instruction, Maintenance and repair

may only be performed by our customer service and/or by companies or persons
authorized by us.

4.2.1

Conditions for the place of installation

The place of installation must fulfil the following conditions.

Flat installation surface.

Freedom from vibrations, oscillations and drafts, as well as the driest possible
installation must be guaranteed for our equipment.

The equipment must be arranged with respect for operating and work sequence, and
taking account of maintenance aspects.

4.2.2

Assemble the device

Unpacking
Open packaging, remove accessories and lift the device carefully out of the packaging.

6.111.98.5.01.13

4-1

Installation

4.2.3

Operating instruction BC II

Leveling

To compensate for any small irregularities in the floor space, the scale can be leveled at
the foot screws using a spirit level.
_______________________________________________________________________

After each change of location, the scale must be re-leveled.

_______________________________________________________________________
1

Position the spirit level

Foot screws

1
2

Fig. 6: BC II 800

2
1

Fig. 7: BC II 100
Turn the foot screws 2 until the air
bubble 3 is located in the center of the
spirit level . 1

Fig. 8: Leveling

4-2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

4.2.4

Installation

Check the electric connection

_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING

Incorrect supply voltage!

Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire.
-

Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power

supply data do not match the connection values of the scale.
The power supply data must be identical.

Inform Bizerba Customer Service.

_______________________________________________________________________

Installation of customer's power supply

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)

Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)

_______________________________________________________________________
Check before mains connection
Before connecting the device, check
-

the power supply data on the designation label

the power supply data of the mains supply

_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

4-3

Installation

4.2.5

Operating instruction BC II

Cable connections

_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION

Do not insert or remove the connection cable when the device

is switched on.
Interfaces are either defect or misfunctioning.
Always switch off the device before inserting or removing the
connection cable.

_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Secure the power cable against falling out when strain drops. 4
_______________________________________________________________________
1

EDP (scale network)

Cash drawer

Power cable

Clip (strain relief)

Fig. 9: BC II 100 / 200

EDP (scale network)

Cash drawer

Power cable

Clip (strain relief)

2
1
4
3

Fig. 10: BC II 800

4-4

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Installation

Example of scale network

Several scales are connected with a switch.
Switch

Scale1

Scale 2

Scale 3

Scale 4

Scale 5 1

Scale 6

Connection scale (EDP, scale network)

_______________________________________________________________________
During installation and cabling of systems the Bizerba guideline
Networks for scales need to be adhered to.
Ask your Bizerba consultant or Bizerba Service.
_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

4-5

Installation

4.2.6

Operating instruction BC II

Rechargeable battery

The BC II devices are available with and without rechargeable batteries.

_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING

Replace the rechargeable battery!

Risk of explosion if not replaced properly.
-

The installation or removal of the battery may only be carried out

by our customer services and/or a company or person assigned
by us.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
Charge battery completely before battery operation.
Procedure:
- Connect mains to scale.
- Switch on scale.
_______________________________________________________________________
Depending on the use and ambient temperature, with a fully charged battery, the scales
can be operated for 20-25 hours without being connected to the mains.
After only 6-7 hours charging time the battery is completely recharged.

Operation with rechargeable batteries

Rechargeable batteries will run down even during prolonged idle periods if the scale is not
connected to the mains. Therefore, connect the scale to the mains at least every
3months.
If the scales are being powered by the mains, the batteries are recharged when switched on
(conservation charging).
_______________________________________________________________________
If the scales are operated at an ambient temperature below 0_C, the
battery cannot be recharged.
_______________________________________________________________________
Overloading the batteries is prevented automatically by an integrated charging circuit. This
charging circuit also prevents any damaging total discharge. The battery lifetime reduces if
it is permanently operated at an almost discharged state.
_______________________________________________________________________
When being operated by battery, the printer prints at a slower speed.
Due to this intentional reduced printing speed, the scales can be
operated for a longer period when not connected to the mains power
supply.
_______________________________________________________________________

4-6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Installation

Battery icon display

EURO per

EUR

Fig. 11: Display

1
Battery icon

When connected to the mains:

--Battery icon not visible.
Scales is connected to the mains.
The batteries are charged.
Arrow flashes slowly
Battery is being charged.
Arrow flashes very fast
The temperature of the battery is less than 0C. A statement as to the charged
state of the battery cannot be made.

When battery operated:

Arrow flashes permanently
The charging of the battery is OK.
Arrow flashes fast
Warning, batteries require charging.
Depending on the age of the battery and the ambient temperature, it is possible to
continue operations for about 60 minutes.
Arrow flashes very fast. In addition, a permanent tone occurs for approx. 10 sec.
The battery is empty. The device is switched off after 10 seconds.

6.111.98.5.01.13

4-7

Installation

4.3

Operating instruction BC II

Commissioning

Commissioning, as well as instruction on the operation, cleaning, maintenance and

servicing is carried out by the relevant Bizerba customer services office or the Bizerba
trade consultant.

4
4.3.1

Switch on device

Prerequisite
- The device has been installed properly and connected to the mains power supply.
-

The scale should not be loaded.

Switch device on/off, see page 6 - 1.

4.4

Decommissioning

If you wish to decommission the scale for a prolonged period of time,

Switch the scale off.

Remove the AC power plug and detach all cable connections.

Clean the scale in accordance with the cleaning instructions.

4-8

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Device and operating controls

5.1

Main switch

Fig. 12: BC II
1
Main switch on BC II 800
2

Main switch on BC II 100 and 200

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-1

Device and operating controls

5.2

Operating instruction BC II

Display
1
2
3
4

5
kg
7

EURO per
6

EUR
5

Fig. 13: Dot 7 display

The display is divided into:
1
Dot Matrix (20x208 Dots)
2

Lit icons

Symbols printed on the glass panel (dependent on country)

Light symbol for system identification

Selling price

Unit price

Weight value

5.2.1

Display icons

Type- and country-dependent icons designate different operating states.

The printed icons are marked by arrows that light up.
= Net display after taring process
= Prepack
= Battery operation/battery charging control,
= Unit price per kg
= Unit price per 100g
= Fixed unit price
= Constant unit price
= Operator number after registration
= Character for display of total
I

= Symbol for single division scale

= Symbol for dual division scale

= Symbol for fixed weight for dot 7 display
= Symbol for fixed weight for 7 segment display

5-2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

5.3

Device and operating controls

Keyboard

_______________________________________________________________________
Keyboard designs are country-dependent.
_______________________________________________________________________

5
5.3.1

Membrane keyboard

There are two transparent modules on the membrane keyboard into which insert-foils can
be inserted if required.

Insert-foil 30 keys DEU

(Country ID, e.g. DEU defines keyboard
labeling)
Insert-foil 54 keys DEU

Membrane keyboard 54 keys

Membrane keyboard 30 keys

4
3

Fig. 14: Example of insert-foils

Example:
3

Fig. 15: Insert foil with 54 key

Fig. 16: Insert foil with 30 keys.

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-3

Device and operating controls

5.3.2
1

Operating instruction BC II

Keyboard

Keyboard 84 keys

Fig. 17: Keyboard

5.3.3

Key functions

Fig. 18: Example of keyboard

5-4

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II
Key
Tab

Device and operating controls

Function
- 54

<PLU 1> to <PLU 54>

PLU = Price Look Up (product plus price, text, etc. is displayed)

19 - 15
1

Non-numeric and special characters <A< to <Z> (function only in menu)

Operator 1 <OP1> to Operator 4 <OP4>

) ]
0

<Reset>

<Fixed tare T1>

T1 - T4

<Fixed tare T1> to <Fixed tare T4>

<Cancellation> (country-specific version)

Void

<Cancellation> (country-specific version)

Mod

<Mod>

Esc

PLU
Man

<Switch> / <Overwrite> (country-specific version)

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-5

Device and operating controls

Key

Operating instruction BC II

Function
<Non-weighed>
<Constant>

F
Prepack

(country-specific version)

<Constant> (country-specific version)

<Tare>

Tare

<Tare> (country-specific version)

Ctrl

Enter

<Enter> (country-specific version)

<Shift>
<Clear> (delete)

Clr

<Clear> (delete)
<Subtotal>
<Total>
<Print> (country-specific version)

5-6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

5.3.4

Device and operating controls

Keyboard options

Menu setting
- Pr631
- 00 to 03 keyboard selection, see page 7 - 149

Additional frame with 24 keys

Additional frame for 24 PLUs.

The additional frame is attached to the basic keyboard.

Fig. 19: Additional 24PLU frame

1
Additional frame
2

Write-on insert

Front-foil with 30 keys

Front-foil with 30 PLU keys.
The front-foil is placed over the top of the basic keyboard.

1
2

Fig. 20: Front foil 30 PLU

1
Front membrane
2

Write-on insert

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-7

Device and operating controls

5.4

Operating instruction BC II

Printer

Models BC II 100 to BC II 800 are equipped with receipt printer or label printer. The
printers operate according to the thermal printing principle. The paper can only be printed
on the thermal side.

5.4.1

Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200

Printer lid BC II 100/200

open
The printer lid
arrows 3 .

3
2

is marked on the top with

Hold the printer lid at the positions

marked by the 3 arrows.
Open the printer lid by pulling it
downwards.
2

Fig. 21: Printer lid BC II 100/200

close
Fold the printer lid upwards.

Side cover BC II 100/ 200

Open
Hold the side cover

at the fluted grip.

Open the side cover pulling it

downwards.
close

Close the side cover by pulling it

upwards.
1

Fig. 22: Side cover BC II 100/ 200

5-8

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Device and operating controls

Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800

Side cover BC II 800

Open
Hold the slide cover at the

grips.

Open the side cover pulling it

downwards.
close
Close the side cover by pulling it
upwards.

Fig. 23: Side cover BC II 800

Printer lid
The printer lid is
arrows 3 .

marked at the bottom with

Open
2

Take hold of the printer lid 2 at the

places marked with the arrows. 3
Open the printer lid by pulling it upwards.
3

Fig. 24: BC II 800 Open printer lid

Fold the printer lid down 2 .

Fig. 25: BC II 800 Close printer lid

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-9

Device and operating controls

5.4.2

Operating instruction BC II

Opening and closing the thermal print head

Label printer in BC II 100/200

open

Place one finger underneath the red grip

element 1 .
Pull the grip element 1 towards you until
the thermal print head disengages and
folds down. 2
1

close
Fig. 26: Label printer in BC II 100
Place your finger on the red grip element
1 .
Press the thermal print head 2 upwards
against the printer roller and then
backwards until the thermal print head
engages.
Ticket and label printer BC 800
open
Place your index finger underneath the
red grip element. 1 .

Push the grip element 1 upwards until

the thermal print head disengages. 2
Fold the thermal print head upwards.

Fig. 27: Opening the thermal print head

close
Place your thumb on the red grip
element.
Push the thermal print head backwards
against the printer roller and then
downwards until the thermal print head
engages.
Fig. 28: Closing the thermal print head

5 - 10

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

5.4.3

Device and operating controls

Ticket printer

Ticket printer paper end

The paper end is indicated by a red mark on the paper. When this mark appears, insert a
new ticket roll.

Insert ticket paper

Remove the empty ticket roll from the
paper feed. 2

Insert a new ticket roll into the paper

feed. 1
Pay attention to the direction of the ticket
paper.
Open the thermal print head
page 5 - 10.

, see

3
4

Fig. 29: Paper ticket printer

Push the ticket paper through the paper
chute 6 , until the start of the roll 5 is
about 80 mm over the thermal print
head. 3
Close the thermal print head,
see page 5 - 10.
Feed the ticket paper past the tear-off
edge of the printer lid.
Close the printer lid.

6.111.98.5.01.13

5 - 11

Device and operating controls

5.4.4

Operating instruction BC II

Label printer

End of label
After printing the last label, insert a new label roll.
1

Insert label roll

Open the side cover and printer lid, see

page 5 - 8.
Open the thermal print head,
see page 5 - 10.
Remove the label roll from the take-up
pin. 3 .
Pull the red peel-off unit 6 outwards.

Pull the backing paper off the take-up

pin. 1

Pull 5 labels off the backing paper of the

new label roll.
Place the new label roll
take-up pin. 3 .

on the
2

Insert the backing paper in accordance

with the direction of the paper and attach
it to the take-up pin. 1 .
The Backing paper must be positioned
on collar. 2

Press the red peel-off unit 6 inwards.

Fig. 30: BC II 100 Label printer

Turn the take-up pin 1 manually until
the first label is peeled off.
Close the thermal print head, see page
5 - 10.
Close the side cover and printer lid, see
page 5 - 8.

5 - 12

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Device and operating controls

Paper label printer

11
10

Take-up arbor for backing paper

Collar

Holding arbor

Label roll

Deflection pin with red adjustable ring

Thermal strip

Printer roller

Label detachment shaft

Deflection pin

Transport roller

Deflection roller with adjustable ring

9
8

7
6

Abb. 31: Paper track in label printer /

BCII800
1
1

Take-up arbor for backing paper

Collar

Holding arbor

Label roll

Deflection pin with red adjustable ring

Thermal strip

Printer roller

Label detachment shaft

Deflection pin

9
8

5
7

Transport roller
Abb. 32: Paper track in label printer /
BCII100/200

Set width of paper

Adjust the red adjustable ring 5 to the
deflection roller by pushing it to the size
of the label.
This is necessary for each paper change
and when changing the paper width.

Fig. 33: Adjustable ring

6.111.98.5.01.13

5 - 13

Device and operating controls

Operating instruction BC II

5 - 14

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation

6.1

Switching on device

The mains switch<On-Off>

is located

on the left side of the scale in the case of BCII 100 / BCII 200

on the right side of the scale in the case of BCII 800.

The scale should not be loaded.

Press mains switch <On-Off>.
Boot appears in the display.
The display test occurs automatically.
All digits and symbols are displayed for approx. 5 sec..
The weight value display is then automatically set to zero 0.000 with the
scale unloaded and is ready for weighing.

6.2

Switch off device

Press mains switch <On-Off>.
The display goes dark after a short time.

6.3

Zerosetting device

After switching on the scale the weight display ranges automatically at zero 0.000 kg
provided that the scale is unloaded.
The scale has an automatic reset device, so that minor zero point changes are
compensated automatically.
The weight value display can (if the display is not set to zero) be reset again with the scale
unloaded.
) ]
0

Press <Zerosetting>.
The weight value display indicates 0,000 kg.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6-1

Operation

6.4

Operating instruction BC II

Operating options

Operating processes marked with an * are not available for all country versions.
Different operating types can be set in the device:
1. Multi-operating mode

see page

6-2

2. Self-service operation

see page 6 - 3

3. Quick-service operation

see page 6 - 4

4. Price labeling with manual triggering *

see page 6 - 5

5. Price labeling with automatic start *

see page 6 - 6

6.4.1

Multiple-operator mode

Multiple salespeople can operate the device at the same time.

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -01
- Pr 510/ 02
- Pr 505
- Setting Pr 520

Setting multi-operator mode

Setting ticket or label layout
Set type of paper
submenu 01 to 08

General operating procedure

Place the article on the scale.
Input price
! @

Press PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU2>.

or
Enter the unit price directly, e.g. EUR 2.98
PLU registration
1

Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

Ticket layout: The article is registered but not printed.
Label layout: The article is registered and the label is printed.
Printout of the article depends on the menu setting Pr
520/02.

Conclude sale
Press <total>.
1

Press the operator key, e.g. <OP1>.

Ticket layout: Item and total are printed on ticket.

Label layout: Printout of the article and the total depends on the menu setting Pr 520/02,
see page7 - 92.
6-2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.4.2

Operation

Self-service mode

_______________________________________________________________________
The article can only be called up via on PLU direct key.
-

Only PLU direct keys under which weight articles are stored can
be called up. Piece PLU, manual PLU or minus PLU cannot be
called up - you hear an acoustic signal.

- Reports cannot be created in this operating mode.

_______________________________________________________________________
Menu setting
- Pr 505
- Pr 510/ 01 -01
- Pr 510/ 02 1

Setting label paper

Setting self-service mode
Setting label layout

Operating procedure:
Place the article on the scale.
Print article
! @

Press the PLU direct key of the article applied e.g. <PLU2>.
The label is printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6-3

Operation

6.4.3

Operating instruction BC II

Quick-service mode

Register with operator key

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -03
- Pr 510/ 02 -1
- Pr521
-0

Setting self-service mode

Setting label layout
Recording with operator key

Operating procedure:

Place the article on the scale.

Call up article
! @

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU2>.

Register article and print

Press operator key <VK1>.

The label is printed.

(dependent on country)
Press <Print>.
The label is printed.

Setting self-service mode

Setting label layout
register automatically

Operating procedure:
Place the article on the scale.
Call up article, then register and print
! @

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU2>.

It is registered to Operator 1.
The label is printed.

6-4

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.4.4

Operation

Price labeling with manual triggering *

Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -04
- Pr 510/ 02 -1
- Pr 525/ 01

Price labeling with release by hand

Label layout
Setting labeling mode

Call up article

Place the article on the scale.

! @

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU2>.

The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.

Register article and print label

Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

The label is printed.
Remove the article from the scale.
Place the next article on the scale.

Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called
up, or until the <C> key is pressed.

Create batch sum label *

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 03 -1

with addition

Press <total>.
The batch sum label is printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6-5

Operation

6.4.5

Operating instruction BC II

Price labeling with automatic start *

Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -05
- Pr 510/ 02 -1
- Pr 525/ 01

Price labeling with automatic release

Label layout
Setting labeling mode

Call up article
Place the article on the scale.
''

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU3>.

The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.

Register article and print label

Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

The label is printed.
Remove the article from the scale.
Place the article on the scale.
The label is printed. Printing happens automatically after each change of weight.
You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called
up, or until the <C> key is pressed.

Create batch sum label *

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 03 -1

with addition

Press <Total>.
The batch sum label is printed.

6-6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.4.6

Operation

Piece price multi- label printing

A number of identical price per piece labels can be created in price labeling mode.
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -04 or 05
- Pr525/ 02 -00-99

Price labeling
Time in sec. between printing of two labels

General operating procedure

Input price.
$

6
Press the PLU direct key for unit
price e.g. <PLU4>.
The constant function

is activated.

1,50

Define number of labels

Press <Multiplication> .

Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15.

1,50

0, 00

0,00

PLU registration
1

Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

The labels are printed.

The number of labels being printed is
continually displayed.

End
Press <C>.

6.111.98.5.01.13

0,000

6-7

Operation

6.4.7

Operating instruction BC II

Fixed weight label multi-printing

A number of identical fixed weight labels can be created in price labeling mode.
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -04 or 05
- Pr525/ 02 -00-99

Price labeling
Time in sec. between printing of two labels

General operating procedure

Press the PLU direct key for fixed

weight e.g. <PLU5>.

The constant function

is activated.

0,500

12, 00

6,00

Define number of labels

Press and hold <Shift>. Then press

Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15.

__
15

Press <Enter>
The number of labels is herewith confirmed.
PLU registration
1

Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

The labels are printed.

0,500

12, 00

6,00

End
Press <C>.

6-8

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.5

Operation

Unit price input via 10-key keypad

_______________________________________________________________________
With key

you can switch between entry of unit price and PLU no.

Switchover depends on the setting in Pr 535.

_______________________________________________________________________

6.5.1

Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

Unit price input Price/kg

Place article on the scale.

0,556

0,00

0,556

8,56

4,76

Enter the unit price.

Read off the selling price.
1

Price per piece manual input

Non-weighed
0,00

Press <non-weighed>.
Enter the price per piece,

Non-weighed
8,65

e.g. 8.65
1

Multiplication of price per piece non-weighed

0,000

0,00

Non-weighed
0,00

Press <non-weighed>.
Enter the price per piece,
e.g. 8.65

[1]

0,00

Non-weighed
8,65
Non-weighed

Press <multiplication>.

8,65

0,00

Non-weighed
Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5.
1

6.111.98.5.01.13

0,000

[1]

6-9

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

Entry of minus amount

Minus
0,00

Press <Minus amount>.

Enter the price per piece,

Minus
- 1,00

e.g. 1.00
1

Multiplication of minus amount input

0,000

0,00

[1]

0,00

Minus
0,00

Press <Minus input>

Minus
Enter the price per piece,
e.g. 1.00

- 1,00
Minus

Press <multiplication>.

- 1,00

Minus
Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5.
1

6 - 10

0,000

0,00

[1]

0,00

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.6

Operation

Cancellation

If the sale is not yet completed (before final total), individual articles can be canceled.
Cancel lastly sold article
Op.
Pcs
1

[1]

Press <Cancellation>.

0,00

Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

[1]

8,60

The last items are displayed.

Press <Cancellation>.
The displayed items are canceled.

0,000

0,00

[1]

0,00

Search for article by Scrolling and cancelling

Several articles have already been sold; a defined article is now to be canceled.
St
1

Press <Cancellation>.
Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.
The last items are displayed.
Scroll until the article you want appears on the display.

Press <Cancellation>.
The displayed items are canceled.

Quit cancellation
You start the Cancel function and want to abort this without starting a cancellation.
Pcs
1

Press <Cancellation>.

Op.

Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

The last items are displayed.
Press <Clear>.

0,000
0,00
You have quit the Cancel function. The article is still registered.

6.111.98.5.01.13

[1]

0,00
[1]

8,60
[1]

0,00

6 - 11

Operation

6.7

Operating instruction BC II

Scroll function

After selling several articles (before total completion) the single articles can be checked in
the display by<Scrolling>
Pcs
1

Press <Cancellation>.
Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.
The last items are displayed.

<Scrolling>upwards.
The items are displayed in descending order.
Press <Clear>.
The scroll function is closed.

6 - 12

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.8

Operation

Constant

Fix unit price or tare value, or unit price and tare value, e.g. for several sequenced sales of
the same article. Depending on menu setting in Pr520/ 01.
PLU articles are fixated if you hold down the constant key, independent of the setting in Pr
520/ 01.
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 01

Constant key function

Switch on fixing.
The symbol
Switch off fixing.
The symbol

6.9

6
illuminates before
before

(dependent on country).

goes out (depending on country)

Subtotal

6 - 13

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

6.11

Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU)

6.11.1

Calling up PLUs

Prerequisite
- Pr 110/ PLU no/ Submenu 1 to 14

PLU articles are created

The PLU call can be implemented by two methods:

Press the PLU direct key.

PLU-no. entry via ten-key keypad.

PLU direct key

Stored PLUs can be called up directly via PLU direct keys.
Tab

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU1>.

The stored values for PLU 1 appear in the display.

Second level of PLU direct keys

With <Shift> twice as many PLUs can be accessed directly, as defined on the keyboard.
Tab

+ 1

Press and hold <Shift> and then press PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU1>.
The stored values for PLU 51, for example, appear in the display.

Example 1:
There are 50 PLU direct keys on the keyboard. By pressing <Shift> +<PLU1> PLU 51 is
accessed.
Example 2:
30 PLU direct keys are defined with Pr 631 on the keyboard. By pressing <Shift>
+<PLU1> PLU 31 is accessed.

6 - 14

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation

PLU input with ten-digit keyboard

The input depends on the menu setting Pr5 35. As an example, select PLU1:
Menu setting
- Pr 535/01 -0
- Pr 535/ 02

Ten-digit keyboard: Unit price input

Number of PLU input digits

Operating procedure
Press <Switching>,

PLU

___

PLU

__1

and PLU number on the 10-key

keypad, e.g. <1>.
Confirm with <Enter>.

Calf liver pat

0.002
-0,002
12,55
_______________________________________________________________________
PLU 1 is displayed.

Operating procedure
- If all digits are entered, it must not be confirmed with <Enter>. The
PLU is displayed immediately.
- If a delay time is set in Pr 535/ 06, the PLU is displayed after a time
delay. This must not be confirmed with <Enter>.
_______________________________________________________________________

or
Menu setting
- Pr 535/01 -1
- Pr 535/ 02

Ten-digit keyboard: PLU input

Number of PLU input digits

Operating procedure
Press the PLU number on the
ten-digit keypad, e.g. <1>.
Confirm with <Enter>.
PLU 1 is displayed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

PLU

___ ___1

Calf liver pat

-0,002
12,55

0.002

6 - 15

Operation

6.11.2

Operating instruction BC II

Operator sales with PLU

Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key.

Place the article on the scale.
Tab

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU1>.

Register, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.

6
Overwrite PLU unit price.
The unit price for the article (PLU unit price) is stored. When the PLU is called up the
saved unit price is displayed. If price-overwriting is permitted, the unit price may be
changed. If the PLU is called up again, the stored unit price is still valid.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06-1

Price overwriting permissible

Place the article on the scale.

Tab

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU1>.

Press <Switching>,
Enter the unit price, e.g. 20.30

Register, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.

Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces

Press a PLU direct key with stored
article type is Non-weighed or
Minus, e.g. <PLU 4>.

1,50

Press <Multiplication>.

Smoked sausage
0

1,50

Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 22.

Smoked sausage
22

1,50

0,000

0,00

6 - 16

Smoked sausage

0,00

[1]

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation

Register manual weight input ( depending on country)

Menu setting
- Pr 606/ 07 -11xx
By Count and fixed weight on.
- Setting into operation see page 7 - 30
Press a PLU direct key with stored
PLU type is Non-weighed or
Minus, e.g. <PLU 4>.
Press <multiplication>.

Smoked sausage
0,118
3,49

0,40

Smoked sausage
0,000
3,49

0,00

Smoked sausage
0,220
3,49

0,76

0,000

0,00

Enter the known weight, e.g.

0.220kg.
Press <Enter>
Entry confirmed, selling price is
displayed.
1

6.111.98.5.01.13

0,00

[1]

6 - 17

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

6.12

Tare functions

6.12.1

Tare balancing for unknown tare values

_______________________________________________________________________
An unknown tare weight ( empties) is a non-article related tare which
is to be weighed and tared.

For scales under a 10 kg weighing range, the entire weighing

range can be tared.

For scales over a 10 kg weighing range, only up to max. 9.995 kg

(max. 4-digit) can be tared (country-dependent).

The tared value is subtracted from the total weighing range.

The tare command is only directly executed when the weight

display is stationary.

If an unknown tare was tared with key <Tare>, it cannot be

overwritten with a known tare (hand tare, PLU tare).

After balancing an unknown tare, a PLU call is possible with PLU

tare, but the PLU tare is ignored.

_______________________________________________________________________

Unknown tare
Weigh article as an empty with unknown weight.
Place the empty container on the scale.
The weight display 1 indicates the weight of
the empty container e.g.: 0,535 kg.

0,535

0,00

0,535
0,00

Press <tare>.
The tare display 2
indicates the weight of the
empty container, 0.535 kg.
The weight display 1 indicates zero.

0,000

NET

Fill the empty container with the article.

The weight display 1 indicates the net
weight of the article 2,000 kg.
The tare display 2 indicates the weight of
the empty container, 0.535 kg.

6 - 18

2,000
1

0,535
0,00

0,00
2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation

Batch tare (country-related)

Determine unknown tare, weigh article, add this to the tare weight and weigh the next
article net.
Place the empty container on the scale.
The weight display 1 indicates the
weight of the empty container, e.g.:
0,535 kg.

0,535

0,00

0,535
0,00

Press <Tare>.
The tare display 2 indicates the weight
of the empty container, 0.535 kg.
The weight display 1 indicates zero.

Fill the empty container with the article.

The weight display 1 indicates the net
weight of the article 0.800 kg.
The tare display 2 indicates the weight
of the empty container, 0.535 kg.
Press <tare>.
Weight of article and of empty container
are added to the new tare weight 2 .
The weight display 1 indicates zero.

0,000

NET

0,800

0,00
2

NET

0,000
1

0,535
0,00

1,353
0,00

0,00
2

For scales under 10 kg you can tare the entire

weighing range.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 19

Operation

6.12.2

Operating instruction BC II

Tare balancing for known tare values

_______________________________________________________________________
Known tare
-

When weighing a packaged article, the tare value must be known

(packaging/product-related tare).

For multiple-division scales, the known tare must always be located

within the smallest division range (country-dependent).

A known (input) tare cannot be overwritten by an unknown

(weighed) tare.

The known tare can be input by 2 methods:

1. Manual tare
2. Tare with PLU tare

_______________________________________________________________________

Manual tare (country-related)

_______________________________________________________________________
Manual taring is not allowed in various countries.
_______________________________________________________________________
Prerequisite
- The scale should not be loaded. Weight value 0,000 kg.

0,00

_,___
0,00

0,00

_,_52
0,00

0,00

0,052
0,00

Press <Tare>.
The manual tare input is opened.

0,000

Enter the known tare value, e.g.

0,052 kg.

0,000

Press <Tare>.
The input tare value is accepted.
The display shows the tare 2 value and
the net weight value 1 .

NET

-0,052
1

6 - 20

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation

PLU tare
Assign known tare value in menu Pr 110 to the respective PLU article.
Menu setting
- Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03
Enter article-related tare values
The PLU tare value is activated and displayed via the PLU call.
Tab

Press e.g. <PLU1>.

Calf liver pat

NET
-0,002
0,00

0.002
0,00

Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4

Menu setting
- Pr 540

Allocate known tare values to the tare keys

Press e.g. <Fixed tare T1>.

The saved tare value is displayed.

NET

-0,004

0,00

0,004
0,00

Tare clearing
1. Manual
Unload the scale.
Press <T>.
The display indicates zero.

2. Automatically

Register article, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.

Unload the scale.
The display indicates zero. The unit price is also deleted.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 21

Operation

6.12.3

Operating instruction BC II

Operator tare

An operator can save a tare value on an operator key. This tare value can be called up
any time.
Prerequisite
- Pr 630
- Pr 630

Key <Operator Tare> must exist.

Key <Save Operator Tare> must exist.

Save tare value weighed

Save tare value of an empty container on operator key e.g. <OP1>.

Operating procedure:

F12

Place empty container on scale.

0,060

0,00

<Press Save Operator Tare>.

Op.
0,060

0,00

0,000

0,00

-0,060

0,00

0,060
0,00
0,060
0,00

0,000

0,00

<Press Save Operator Tare>.

Op.
0,000

0,00

Press operator key<OP1>.

Op.
0,000

0,00

-,- - 0,00

0,00

0,070
0,00

-0,070

0,00

0,070
0,00

0,000

0,00

Press operator key<OP1>.

Tare value is displayed.

Remove empty container from scale.
Press
Tare key <T>.
The tare display is deleted. The tare
value is saved under operator key
<OP1>.

Save tare value entered

F13

The input field is displayed.

Enter tare value, e.g. 0.070kg.
Press tare key <T>.

Oper.
0,000

Press tare key <T>.

The tare display is deleted. The tare
value is saved under operator key
<OP1>.

6 - 22

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation

Call up operator tare saved

Scale is unloaded and in untared condition.
F13

Press<Operator Tare>.
Oper. is displayed.

Op.
0,000

0,00

0,070
0,00

Press operator key<OP1>.

The saved tare value is displayed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

-0,070

6 - 23

Operation

6.13

Operating instruction BC II

Assisted sales with ticket

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -01
Multi-operator mode
- Pr 510/ 02 -0
Ticket layout
Set the ticket paper at the label printer
- Pr 505
-0
Ticket paper

Example: Operator 1 sells various articles that are programmed in the scale, cancels the last
article sold and concludes the sale with the total.
Apply article on scale
Tab

Call up article (weighed) with PLU

direct key e.g. <PLU1>.

Register article on <OP1>

.
1

Remove product from the scale.

2
! @

Call up next article (hand),

e.g. <PLU 2>.

Register article on <OP1>

Call up next article (minus),

.
4

e.g. <PLU 3>.

Register article on <OP1>

.
Fig. 34: Print example

Open cancellation function.

Press operator key<OP1>

Confirm cancellation
Last item is canceled 4 .

Open total printing.

Press operator key<OP1>.

Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed, see printing example.

6 - 24

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.14

Operation

Talon

The talon includes the number of items and the total. It helps the operator check
everything later. The talon is automatically printed after the total printout. A delay of
between 1 and 99 seconds can occur.
The delay can be interrupted by pressing the <Total> key. The talon is then printed
immediately.
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 06 -01 up to 99 seconds delay in printing
1

Ticket counter

Operator number

Total

No. of items

6
1

Fig. 35: Talon example

6.15

Print ticket upon request

In multi-operation mode the ticket printout can be triggered after sales process is finished,
if requested. If the key combination<Shift> and <OP> is not pressed, the total occurs only
in the display.
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 11 -0

Print ticket only upon request

Operating procedure: Ticket printing upon request

Apply article on scale
Tab

Call up article (weighed) with PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU1>.

0.002
6,25

Register article on <OP1>.

Press<Total>

Calf
liver pat
NET
0,498
12,55

Total

Press operator key<OP1>.

6,25

The total is displayed.

On request:
+ 1

<Press> Shift and press then operator key <OP1>.

The ticket is printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 25

Operation

6.16

Operating instruction BC II

Repeat ticket

Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 07 -1

with -Repeat ticket-

The complete and printed ticket can be printed again.

Prerequisite
- Ticket completion with <total> and operator key e.g. <OP1>.

+ 1

Press and hold <Shift>. Then

press operator key 1 <OP1>
A copy is printed.
You can tell the copy from the
original by the asterisk 1 after the
ticket number 2 .

Fig. 36: Repeat ticket

6.17

Open ticket again

Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 08 -1

with -Re-open ticket-

If the customer requires further items after printout of the ticket, a completed ticket can be
re-opened.
There are 2 ways of opening a ticket again.
-

Open the last ticket via the operator key.

Open a ticket via the ticket number

6 - 26

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.17.1

Operation

Open the last ticket via the operator key.

Prerequisite
- Ticket completion with <total> and operator key e.g. <OP1>.
Open the last ticket:
Ctrl

Press and hold <CTRL>. Then

____

press <Enter>.

Press operator key e.g.

OP1<.>

[1]

0,000

0,00

The last ticket is now open. Additional articles may now be sold.
Finalize the re-opened ticket:
Press <Total>.
Press <OP1>.

Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.

6.17.2

Open the ticket via ticket number

Open ticket again:

Ctrl

Press and hold <CTRL>. Then

press <Enter>.

____

Enter the ticket number<8>

___8

press <Enter>

[1]

0,000
0,00
0,00
Ticket no. 8 is open again. The operator number is shown in the display.
Additional articles can be sold via the displayed operator number.
Finalize the re-opened ticket:
Press <Total>.
1

Press e.g.<OP1>.

Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 27

Operation

6.17.3

Operating instruction BC II

Overwrite VAT from PLU

A VAT rate is assigned to PLU. If PLU is called up, a different VAT rate can be assigned to
the PLU with the VAT key.
Prerequisite
- Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 20 -1 The PLU is assigned to a VAT rate number from 1-5.
- Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 -1 The VAT can be overwritten.
- Pr630
The VAT key can be found on the keyboard.
- Pr631/ 03
re-programmed keyboard is set

Operating procedure:
Apply article on scale
Tab

Call up article with PLU direct key, e. g. <PLU 1> with VAT number 1 (19%)

Press VAT key, e. g. with VAT number 2 (7%)

Register article on <OP1>.

Article is registered with 7% VAT
Press<Total>

Press operator key<OP1>.

The ticket is printed. After <Total> VAT from PLU is assigned to article.

6 - 28

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.18

Operation

Serviced selling with label layout

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01
- Pr 510/ 02
- Pr 510/ 03
- Pr 520/ 02

-01
-1
-1
-2

Multi-operator mode
Label layout
with addition of customer total
Only print article label

Example:
Operator <OP1> sells different articles that are programmed in the scales, and
cancels the article last sold.
Place article on the scale.
Tab

Call up article (weighed) via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU1>.
Register article on <OP1>.

The label is printed immediately.

Remove article from the scale.

! @

Call up next article (hand),

e.g. <PLU 2>.

The label is printed immediately.

Call up next article (minus), e.g. <PLU 3>.

Register article on <OP1>.

The label is printed immediately.

Open cancellation function.

Press operator key<OP1>.

Cancel

Last item is canceled.

No label is printed for a cancellation.

Display total
1

Press <Total> and operator e.g. <OP1>

in sequence.
The total is displayed. No total label is printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 29

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

By-Count

6.19

By Count article

_______________________________________________________________________
The By Count article type must be put into operation, see page
7 - 30.
_______________________________________________________________________
Sell By Count article

Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -3
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1

Unit price input (price per package)

By Count article type
Number of pieces per package
with back calculation (price per piece is printed on label)

Operating procedure
$

Call up by-count article via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU1>.

Press operator key<OP1>.

Smoked sausage
3

1,50

The label with the package price 1

and the price per piece 2 is printed.
The price per piece is not printed on the
ticket.

Fig. 37: By Count label (1)

6 - 30

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation
By-Count

By Count with mandatory input of number of pieces

The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. The package price is
recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03
number of pieces)
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1
- Pr 110/ 16 -1

Article type by-count (price per package in relation to

Number of pieces per package
with back calculation (price per piece)
with mandatory input

6
Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces
$
Smoked sausage
Call up by-count article via PLU direct key
4
3
e.g. <PLU1>.
Input of number of pieces is required
Quantity
3

1,50

Enter number of pieces, e.g. <5>

The new number of pieces per package
and the calculated package price are
displayed.
1

Quantity
5

2,50

Press operator key<OP1>.

The label with the new package
price 1 and the price per piece 2 is
printed.
The price per piece is not printed on the
ticket.
2

Fig. 38: By Count label (2)

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 31

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

By-Count
By Count with overwriting of package price
The set package price can be overwritten. The price per piece is recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03
number of pieces)
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1
- PR 110/ 06 -1

Article type by-count (price per package in relation to

Number of pieces per package
with back calculation (price per piece)
Price overwrite permitted

Operating procedure with overwriting of package price

Call up by-count article via PLU

direct key e.g. <PLU 4>.
Press <Switch>
The package price is set to
0.00
Enter new package price
e.g.5.00

Smoked sausage
3

1,50

Smoked sausage
3

0,00

Smoked sausage
3

5,00

Press operator key<OP1>.

The label with the new package
price 1 and the price per piece 2 is
printed.
The price per piece is not printed on the
ticket.
2

Fig. 39: By Count label (3)

6 - 32

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation
By-Count

By Count with overwriting of package price and number of pieces

The stored package price is overwritten. This changes the price per piece. The stored
number of pieces per package is then overwritten. The package price and the price per
piece are recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03
number of pieces)
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1
- PR 110/ 06 -1

Article type by-count (price per package in relation to

Number of pieces per package
with back calculation (price per piece)
Price overwrite permitted

Operating procedure with overwriting of package price and number of pieces

Call up by-count article via PLU

direct key e.g. <PLU 4>.

Press <Switch>
The package price is set to
0.00
Enter new package price
e.g.<5.00>

Smoked sausage
3

1,50

Smoked sausage
3

0,00

Smoked sausage
3

5,00

Smoked sausage
0

5,00

Smoked sausage
5

8,33

Press key <Multiplication>

The number of pieces is set
to 0
Enter number of pieces,
e.g<5>
The new number of pieces and
the calculated package price are
displayed.
1

Press operator key<OP1>.

The label with the calculated package
price 1 and the calculated price per
piece 2 is printed.
The price per piece is not printed on the
ticket.

2
1

Fig. 40: By Count label (4)

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 33

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

By-Count
By Count with overwriting of number of pieces and package price
The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. This changes the package
price. The final package price is then entered. The price per piece is recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03
number of pieces)
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1
- PR 110/ 06 -1

Article type by-count (price per package in relation to

Number of pieces per package
with back calculation (price per piece)
Price overwrite permitted

6
Operating procedure with overwriting of number of pieces and package price
$

Call up by-count article via PLU

direct key e.g. <PLU 4>.

Smoked sausage
3

1,50

Smoked sausage
0

1,50

Smoked sausage
5

2,50

Smoked sausage
5

0,00

Smoked sausage
5

0,75

Press key <Multiplication>

The number of pieces is set
to 0.
Enter number of pieces,
e.g<5>
The package price changes.
Press <Switch>
The package price is set to
0.00
Enter new package price
e.g.<0.75>
1

Press operator key<OP1>.

The label with the entered final
package price 1 and the calculated
price per piece is printed. 2
The price per piece is not printed on the
ticket.

Fig. 41: By Count label (5)

6 - 34

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation
Fixed weight

6.20

Fixed weight

The stored fixed weight of the article is used for price calculation instead of the weighed
weight.
_______________________________________________________________________
The fixed weight article type must be put into operation like the By
Count article type, see page 7 - 30.
_______________________________________________________________________
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
- Pr 110/PLU no./17

Unit price input (price per fixed weight)

Type fixed weighed
Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)

Operating procedure
F

Call up fixed weight article via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU 22>.

Tin of sausage
0,125
2,20

Press operator key<OP1>.

The ticket with selling price
fixed weight is printed. 2

0,28

and

2
1

Fig. 42: Fixed weight (1)

Fixed weight with mandatory input
The fixed weight must always be entered in the sale.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01
Unit price input
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1

6.111.98.5.01.13

Type fixed weighed

Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib
with mandatory input of fixed weight

6 - 35

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

Fixed weight
Operating procedure with mandatory input of fixed weight
F

Call up fixed weight article via

PLU direct key e.g.<PLU 22>.

Tin of sausage
0,125
220

Fixed weight input is required.

Fixed weight
0,000

Enter new fixed weights,

Fixed weight
0,150

e.g<0150>.

0,28

Press <Enter> key.

The new fixed weight and the
calculated selling price are
displayed.

Tin of sausage
0,150
220

0,33

Press operator key<OP1>.

The new fixed weight 1 and the selling
price 2 are printed.

Fig. 43: Fixed weight (2)

Fixed weight with overwriting of unit price

The stored unit price can be overwritten.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01
Unit price input
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
- Pr 110/PLU no./17
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1

6 - 36

Type fixed weighed

Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)
Price overwriting permissible

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation
Fixed weight

Operating procedure for fixed weight with unit price overwrite

The selling price is determined with the new unit price and the stored fixed weight.
F

Call up fixed weight article via

PLU direct key e.g.<PLU 22>.

Press <Switch>
The price is set to 0.00.
Enter new unit price, e.g.<200>.

Tin of sausage
0,125
2,20

0,28

Tin of sausage
0,125
0,00

0,00

Tin of sausage
0,125
2,00

0,25

Press operator key<OP1>.

The new unit price 2 and the

calculated selling price 1 are printed.

Fig. 44: Fixed weight (3)

Change fixed weight

Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01
Unit price input
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
- Pr 110/PLU no./17

6.111.98.5.01.13

Type fixed weighed

Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)

6 - 37

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

Fixed weight
Operating procedure for changing fixed weight
F

Call up fixed weight article via

PLU direct key e.g.<PLU 22>.

Tin of sausage
0,125
2,20

0,28

Press <Multiplication>.
The selling price disappears and
the fixed weight is set to 0.000.

Enter new fixed weight,

e.g<0150>.

Tin of sausage
0,000
2,20

Tin of sausage
0,500
2,20

1,10

The calculated selling price is

displayed.
1

Press operator key<OP1>.

The new fixed weight 1 and the
calculated selling price 2 are printed.

Fig. 45: Fixed weight (4)

6 - 38

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation
By Count fixed weight

6.21

By Count fixed weight

In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight.
Sell By Count fixed weight article
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
Unit price input (price per package)
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 07-5
By Count fixed weight article type (fixed weight and
price refer to pieces per package)
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
Number of pieces per package
- Pr 110/ 17
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)

Operating procedure
D

Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU

direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.

Tin of sausage
0,250
3

2,10

Press operator key<OP1>.

Fixed weight
are printed.

and selling price

Fig. 46: By Count fixed weight (1)

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 39

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

By Count fixed weight

By Count fixed weight with mandatory input
The stored fixed weight per package must be overwritten.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -5
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- Pr 110/ 17
- Pr 110/ 19-1

Unit price input (price per package)

By Count fixed weight article type
Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
Number of pieces per package
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)
with mandatory input of fixed weight

6
Operating procedure for By Count fixed weight with mandatory input
D

Call By Count fixed weight article

via PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.
Fixed weight input is required.

Tin of sausage
0,250
3

2,10

Fixed weight
0,000

Enter new fixed weight,

e.g<0500> g.
Fixed weight
0,500

Press <Enter> key.

The selling price remains the
same. The price per kg changes
but is not displayed.

Tin of sausage
0,500
3

2,10

Press operator key<OP1>.

The altered price per kg 1 and the

new fixed weight 2 are printed.

Fig. 47: By Count fixed weight (2)

6 - 40

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation
By Count fixed weight

Change number of pieces

Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -5
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- Pr 110/ 17

Unit price input (price per package)

By Count fixed weight type
Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
Number of pieces per package
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)

Operating procedure for changing the number of pieces

Call By Count fixed weight article

via PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.

Tin of sausage
0,250
3

2,10

Tin of sausage
0,250
0

2,10

Tin of sausage
0,417
5

3,50

Press <Multiplication>.
The number of pieces is set to 0.

Enter number of pieces,

e.g<5>
The calculated selling price and
the new fixed weight are displayed
immediately.
Press operator key<OP1>.

The new fixed weight 1 and the

calculated selling price 2 are printed.

Fig. 48: By Count fixed weight (3)

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 41

Operation

Operating instruction BC II

By Count fixed weight

By Count fixed weight with mandatory input of number of pieces
The stored number of pieces per package must be overwritten.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -5
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- Pr 110/ 17
- Pr 110/ 16-1

Unit price input (price per package)

By Count fixed weight type
Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
Number of pieces per package
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)
with mandatory input of number of pieces

6
Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces
D

Call By Count fixed weight article

via PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.
Input of number of pieces is required

Tin of sausage
0,250
3

2,10

Number of pieces
0,250
3

2,10

Number of pieces
0,583
7

4,90

Enter number of pieces,

e.g<7>
The calculated selling price and
the new fixed weight are displayed
immediately.
1

Press operator key<OP1>.

The new package price 1 and the
number of pieces 2 are printed.

Fig. 49: By Count fixed weight (5)

6 - 42

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Operation
By Count fixed weight

By Count fixed weight with overwriting of the package price

The set package price can be overwritten. The price per kg is recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -5
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- Pr 110/ 17
- Pr 110/ 06 -1

Unit price input (price per package)

By Count fixed weight article type
Number of pieces per package
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)
Price overwrite permissible

Operating procedure with overwriting of package price

Call By Count fixed weight article

via PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.

Tin of sausage
0,250
3

2,10

Tin of sausage
0,250
3

0,00

Tin of sausage
0,250
3

5,00

Press <Switch>
The package price is set to
0.00.
Enter new package price
e.g.<500>
Press operator key<OP1>.

The new package price 1 and the new

kg price 2 are printed.

Fig. 50: By Count fixed weight (4)

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 43

Operation

6.22

Operating instruction BC II

Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out

Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 04
- Pr 520/ 05
- Pr 550/ 12 -1

Cash register function

Payment in/out
Print out amount paid in/due on ticket

Operating procedure
Record the article.

Press <Total>.

Op.

[1]

0,00
1

Press the operator key, e.g.

<OP1>.

Total

[1]

2,71

The customer pays the exact amount

If exact amount, close sales
with total key.

Payment out

[1]

0,00

The ticket is printed and the cash drawer opens.

Customer pays, for example with 5.00

Enter the amount.

Payment in

[1]

5,00

Delete the incorrect entry with <C> and enter the amount again.
Payment out
[1]
*
Save input.
2,29
The ticket is printed, the cash
drawer opens and the change is
indicated.

6 - 44

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

6.23

Operation

Product with data of origin

When selling beef, for example, the customer should be provided with information on
origin, rearing, place of slaughter and possibly breed. The beef is marked with a
traceability number, which is entered when sold.
Traceability data is printed on the ticket or label for the serviced selling mode and price
labeling.
The weight of the sold meat and the number of items are saved in the traceability data
sales report.

There are two possible operating procedures for products with data of origin:
-

Input traceability no. manually.

Use defined traceability no.

6.23.1

Sale with manual input of the traceability number

Prerequisite
Traceability texts have to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no. 10.
PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1
- Pr 515/ 03 - 1

with traceability number

Input traceability no. manually

Operating procedure
Place the beef, for example, on the scales.
Tab

Press the PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU 1> (beef).
If the product contains traceability
data, the weight, unit price and
selling price are only displayed
briefly.

0,206

A prompt to input the abbreviated

traceability number then appears.

12,55

2,59

12,55

2,59

Enter the traceability number, e.g. 02.

Traceability number 02 corresponds to PLU number 9902.

Confirm the entry.
The weight, unit price and selling
are are displayed again.
1

0,206

Registerfor example at Operator 1 <OP1>.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 45

Operation

6.23.2

Operating instruction BC II

Sale with fixed traceability number.

Prerequisite
A traceability text has to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no./10.
PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts.

Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1
- Pr 515/ 04 - 00-99
- Pr 515/ 03 - 2

with traceability number

Define traceability number
Use defined traceability no.

All products (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text from the
set traceability number.
Operating procedure
Place the beef, for example, on the scales.
Tab

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU 1> (beef).

If the product includes traceability data, the set traceability number is
automatically processed. The weight, unit and selling price are displayed. The
traceability numbers is not displayed.

Registerfor example at Operator 1 <OP1>.

The sold quantity is booked separately in the traceability data sales report.

6 - 46

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming

Menus marked with an asteriks *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all
country versions.

7.1

Initial display

If the display is assigned, press <C>.

Net weight display

Unit price display

Selling price display

0,000

0,00

kg T kg

Price/kg

0,00
Price

Fig. 51: Initial display

7.2

Menu password

No password
The device is supplied without a password.
Menu call-up is carried out with having to enter a password.
PASS
______

With password
Activate password entry, see Pr 690 on page
7 - 150.
Once the password input has been activated, a
correct password has to be entered.
The password consists of 6 figures.

PASS

An symbol appears in the display for each

figure that is entered.
If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7-1

Programming

7.3

Operating instruction BC II

Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu

Menu call-up is executed from the scales' output display.

General programming sequence

Menu call-up
Press the <Mod>key.

Menu selection
Enter the program number via the 10-key keypad.

Submenu selection
Enter the submenu number and confirm with the <Enter> key.

Make settings
Confirm settings with <Enter> key.

Exit menu
Press the <Mod>key.

Example:
Menu call-up

Pr
Call up menu

Menu selection
Select menu

Pr115
01

Submenu selection
Select submenu, e.g. 2 print
PLU list

Pr115
_2

confirm
Make settings
Enter the start to the range,

Pr115
02
____11-999999

e.g. PLU no.11

confirm
Enter the end of the range,

Pr115
02
000011-____25

e.g. PLU no.25

confirm
The list, from PLU no. 11 to PLU no. 25, is printed.
Exit menu
Exit menu.
The scale returns to the initial display.

7-2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming

Input correction
Error inputs can be undone by pressing key <Clear>.
Press key <Escape> to go to previous level, the old values remain intact.
Key <Clear>to clear entry.
Esc

Use key <Escape> to go to previous level.

_______________________________________________________________________
If single items were registered and no total has been created, it is not
possible to switch to the programming mode.
The operator accounts have to be closed.
_______________________________________________________________________

7.4

Initial scale setting

Set the type of paper to be used.

Call up menu
Pr505
Select menu

1
Pr505

Select type of paper

0= Ticket paper
1= Label paper (only possible for label printer)

confirm

Set the desired main operating mode.

Set main operating mode and print layout in menu Pr510,
see page 7 - 84 and 7 - 107.
e.g. setting multi-operating mode
and ticket layout
Design ticket

Pr510/01 -01
Pr 510/ 02-0
Pr 550, see page 7 - 107

Set the required switching operation mode.

Set switching operation mode and print layout in menu Pr511,
see page 7 - 86 and 7 - 114.
e.g. setting multi-operating mode
and label layout
Design label

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr511/01 -01
Pr 511/ 02-1
Pr 555, see page 7 - 114

7-3

Programming

7.5

Operating instruction BC II

Overview of list

Prerequisite
- Insert the ticket paper for scales with a label printer.
- Pr 505
-0 Select ticket paper

7.5.1

PLU article
print, see Pr 115, page 7 - 50
Create see Pr 110, on page7 - 39

Scale number

Unit price

Tare

4
5

Article with data of origin

Price overwriting permissible

PLU text

Shelf-life days

Barcode

Product group number

PLU number / article number

Date and time

8
7

4
6

Fig. 52: Article list

7.5.2

Header and footer texts

print, see Pr 205/ 02 on page 7 - 55
Create see Pr 201, on page7 - 53

Scale number

Enter header or footer text

Text number

Date and time

3
2

Fig. 53: Header and footer text list

7-4

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

7.5.3

Programming

Additional texts
see Pr 205/ 01 on page 7 - 55
Create see Pr 200, on page7 - 52

Scale number

Supplement. text

Text number

Date and time

7
2 1
Fig. 54: Suppl. text list

7.5.4

Scrolling message
Print, see Pr 205/ 03
Create see Pr 202,

Scale no

Scrolling message text

Scrolling message number

Date and time

page 7 - 55
on page7 - 54
4

Fig. 55: Scrolling message list

7.5.5

PLU direct keys

print, see Pr 536, page 7 - 103

change see Pr 535 on page 7 - 100
PLU number (article no.)

PLU direct key

Fig. 56: PLU direct keys

6.111.98.5.01.13

7-5

Programming

7.5.6

Barcode structure
, see Pr 211,
Create see Pr 210,

Operating instruction BC II

Structure number

Barcode format

Field 1 code constant

4
5

Content field 1
Field 2 part string from PLU

No. of digits for field 2

Field 3 price

No. of digits for field 3

Conversion of variable values

page7 - 62
on page7 - 58

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8 9

Fig. 57: Barcode structures

7.5.7

BLD labels

BLD= Bizerba Label Designer.

Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts.
Printout of BLD label numbers.
Print list, see Pr 220/01, see page7 - 68
Delete list, see Pr 225/01, see page 7 - 68.
Create layout with BLD. Example of BLD label see page 7 - 115.

Scale number

Label name (enter in BLD)

Date and time

Fig. 58: Example of BLD label list

7-6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

7.5.8

Programming

Logos

Printout of logo saved in the scales.

_______________________________________________________________________
Logos can be designed in the BLD. The BLD logos are given a
number and sent to the scales where they are stored.
If a logo exists in the scales with the same number, the existing logo is
replaced by the BLD logo.
If this BLD logo is deleted in the scales (Pr 225/02) the previous logo
stored under this number is available again.
_______________________________________________________________________
Print, see Pr 220/ 02 on page 7 - 68
Delete see Pr 225/02, see page 7 - 69

Scale number

Logo name

Logo

Logo ID
Date and time

4
2
3

Fig. 59: Example of logo list

6.111.98.5.01.13

7-7

Programming

7.5.9

Operating instruction BC II

VAT rates

Printing saved VAT rates.

Print see Pr 231/ 01 on page 7 - 71
Delete see Pr 231/02, see page 7 - 71
Create see Pr 230, on page7 - 69

VAT number

VAT rate

VAT text

Including or excluding VAT

1
2

7-8

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

7.6

Programming

General procedure for text input

Texts are entered in the program menus:

Pr 200 supplementary text,
-

Pr 201 header and footer texts

PR 202 scrolling message

Pr110/ PLU no. / 10 PLU article texts

Font type

Line number (line 1)

Available memory space (in byte)

Pr200
C 1500 LI H3

Fig. 60: Example of display

Font H
HThe font is determined by the selected layout (ticket or label)
H15 The font type is 15 (Script 15).
Change font
Clr +

Press and hold <CTRL>. Then press <0>.

Enter the font, e.g.15

Press key<Enter>.

l
H1

_15_

^15;I
C 1496

The font is now Script 15. Also for

the following lines

H 15

_______________________________________________________________________
The font can be changed any time. Within the text of a line or in the
next line. The last font set applies until the next change.
_______________________________________________________________________
The overview of font types (script) in the scale
can be printed out via Pr 702.

Fig. 61: Font 4-9

6.111.98.5.01.13

7-9

Programming

Change line
CR

Operating instruction BC II

Press key <CR> for the next

Pr200
C 1499 L2 H15

line.
Change up and down between existing lines.
Save entry
Pr200
Press key<Enter>.

C 1499 L2 H15

7
Keys with alpha and special characters
Lower case is generally selected by pressing the key.
Character a:
A

Press key<19>.

Character A:
A

+ 19

Press and hold key <Shift>,

then press key <19>.

If there are 2 characters on a key, these must be called up as follows:

Character :
?

Press key<39>.

Character ?:
Ctrl

+ 39

Press and hold key <Control>.

then press key<39>.

7 - 10

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming

Special character:
Example of decimal input of unicode characters.
Character I:

Pr200
C 1500 LI H-

Ctrl

Press and hold <Ctrl>.

then press <4>.

l
UCd

_____

UCd

__8364

Press the decimal figures for

the unicode for the desired
character.

Confirm with <Enter>.

C 1498 LI H-

Enter example of hex value input.

Character I:

Pr200
C 1500 LI H-

Ctrl

Press and hold <Ctrl>.

then press <2>.
A

19 30

6.111.98.5.01.13

l
UCH

____

requested character.

UCH

_20Ac

Confirm with <Enter>.

Enter the hex value for the

C 1498 LI H-

7 - 11

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

CTRL Sequences in the editor

7
1

Shortcuts

Function

CTRL + 0

Change font

CTRL + 1

Activate and deactivate Pinyin mode

Only for Chinese program
and dot seven display. 1

CTRL + 2

Enter Unicode hexadecimal number

CTRL + 3

GB 3212 mode
Only for Chinese program

CTRL + 4

Enter Unicode decimal number

In Pinyin Mode there is an automatic switching in the Pinyin input, if a character A to Z

is selected in the Editor.

7 - 12

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming

Function keys of text input

delete final character

Delete line

Move cursor in text to the left or right

Control printout of current text line

Control printout of all text lines

Text example
Enter article text, e.g.: Racltte cheese
R

+ 13

Ctrl

acl

tte

Space

44
K

+ 26
E

20 12

Cheese

Control printout: Racltte cheese

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 13

Programming

7.7

Operating instruction BC II

Overview of scrolling messages

Define scrolling message text

Define in Pr 202

Pr202
01

Select 202
Scrolling message for text number input

Pr202
02

01-99
l

Press <Enter> key.

C 500 LI H-

Scrolling message for text input,

e.g.
&Z, You are being served by &B04; Mr. Mller
For text input, see page 7 - 9.
Control characters:
&Z;= Display character-by-character
-

&W;= Display word-by-word (standard)

&Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)

&Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)

_______________________________________________________________________
To control the text, the control characters must be entered in
front of the text and concluded with a <; > semicolon. The
control characters can be entered at any point between the text.
_______________________________________________________________________

Scrolling message
Menu setting
- Pr 516/ 01 -01

Select scrolling text number.

Select display location e.g. 2= Scrolling message on operator

Pr 516/ 02 -2
and customer side
or
Pr 516/ 02 -1
side
or
Pr 516/ 02 -0
customer side
Pr 516/ 03 -1

7 - 14

Select display location e. g. 1= Scrolling message on operator

Select display location e. g. 0= Scrolling message on

Scrolling message starts with empty display

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Barcode

7.8

Barcode overview

Procedure:
1.

Create barcode structure

Pr 210
Enter structure number
Pr 210/01 Define barcode format (EAN 13 or code 128)
Pr 210/ 02 Enter constant

- Pr 210/03 Define numeric value

_______________________________________________________________________
If several numeric values are defined for a barcode, Menu Pr
210/ 03 must be called up again for each value. Only press
numeric key <3> and confirm with <Enter>.
_______________________________________________________________________
-

Pr 210/ 03 Define another numeric value

Pr210/ 04 Save structure

Example
Structure number (Pr 210), code format (Pr 210/ 01) and constant ( Pr 210/ 02) are
entered.
Further operating procedure for numeric value input:
Pr210
03
01040
Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 01040 (price)
Pr210
04
Confirm input
Confirm submenu 03

Submenu 4 is displayed
Presskey <3>
Select submenu 03 again

Pr210
03

Pr210
03
12030
Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 12030 (department no.)
Confirm submenu 03

Confirm input
Submenu 4 is displayed
Confirm submenu 04

Pr210
04
l
04

C 291 L11

H-

Save code structure

The code structure is checked and adopted if valid.
If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure
must be re-entered from the beginning.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 15

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Manufacturer code WAN 13

Release barcode printing

Ticket
- Pr 550/ 01 Release barcode print on ticket for product, total and talon.
- Pr 550/ 02 Define barcode height 5-22 mm.
Label
- Pr 555/ 06 Release barcode print on label for article, total.
- Pr 555/ 07 Define barcode height 5-22 mm.

Allocate barcode
The barcode can be produced for the following data:
Articles not saved in the scales:
- Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 215/02
-

Non-PLU non-weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/03

Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/ 04

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 /05

Articles saved in the scales:

- Article (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110/PLU no./ 05
-

For all articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211/ 03

Barcode types:
Manufacturer code EAN 13
see page 7 - 17
The manufacturer's barcode is entered with 13 digits. The code is directly assigned to the
article e.g. in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 215/ 02, 03, 04.
Instore EAN 13
see page 7 - 18
A code structure must be defined for the EAN 13 code. Definition in Pr 210.
Th code structure number from Pr210 is e.g. assigned to an article in Pr110/PLU no/05 or
all articles in Pr 211 /03.
EAN 13 printout has 13 digits.
Code 128
see page 7 - 23
A code structure must be defined for Code 128. Definition in Pr210.
Th code structure number from Pr210 is e.g. assigned to an article in Pr110/PLU no/05 or
all articles in Pr 211 /03.
Code 128 printout can be any width. The barcode is limited by the possible printing area.

7 - 16

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Manufacturer code WAN 13

Manufacturer code WAN 13

13 digits have to be entered for the manufacturer code.
Enter numbers 1400151300062.

The first digit 1 identifies the entry as

the manufacturer code and is not printed.
Code digit for code format
1= manufacturer code

Pr110
05

1 400151300062

Fig. 62: Entering the manufacturer code

7
The following 12 digits are converted into
a barcode and are printed as they are
entered 2 .
The last digit is a check digit created by
the scale 3 .
3

Fig. 63: Print manufacturer code

_______________________________________________________________________
There are different types of barcode. One of the most common
barcodes is the 13-digit code for consumer articles. The following
example shows how the barcode is broken down:

Country digit

Manufacturer
number

Article number

Check digit

The country digit indicates in which country a manufacturer has

applied for the barcode. The numbers 400 to 440, for example,
stand for Germany.

The manufacturer number provides information on the producer

and is issued by GS1 Germany.

The article number is specified by the manufacturer. Each article

has its own number and can therefore be identified worldwide.

The check digit is a number that has been calculated from all the
other digits. It helps to avoid reading errors in the scanner.

_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 17

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Instore code EAN 13

A barcode structure must be defined for the instore code.
The barcode structure also defines which values are applied from the scales. The number
of digits per field is also defined in the structure.
Menu setting
- Pr 210 /structure number/ 01,02, 03
- Pr 210/ 04

Create structure
Check and save structure

12 digits must be defined for EAN 13.

The number of available 12 digits is divided into fields in the barcode structure. Each field
can be set individually in Pr210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03. The fields are counted from left to
right.
_______________________________________________________________________
Several encoded values (fields) can be set in a row, to do so
re-access submenu 02 or 03 .
The number of digits in all fields must be exactly 12.
If this is more or less, the structure is rejected.
_______________________________________________________________________

7 - 18

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Instore code EAN 13

Example: Code structure for in-store code EAN 13 with 3 fields

12 digits are available for printing. The 13th digit is a check number from the scale.

Fig. 64: Code digit (Field 1), Substring/Constant (Field 2), Selling Price (Field 3)
Menu

Input example

Note

Printing in field

Pr 210

Code structure number

Use this structure

number in Pr 110/
PLU no./ 05 or
Pr 211/ 03
Pr 215/ 02
Pr 215/ 03
Pr 215/ 04
Pr 215/ 05

Pr 210/ 01

00002

Code EAN 13 with OCR

Pr 210/ 02

Code digit for price

2 Digits

Field 1 (code digit)

Pr 210/ 03

05040

Substring/Constant
4 Digits

Enter field 2 (sub

string) in
Pr 110/ PLU-No./
05 or
Pr 215/ 02
Pr 215/ 03
Pr 215/ 04
Pr 215/ 05

Pr 210/ 03

01060

Selling price
6 Digits

Field 3 (Price)

Pr 210/ 04

6.111.98.5.01.13

Check and save struc

ture

7 - 19

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Instore code EAN 13

Example:
Create barcode structure in Pr210
The following in-store barcode is to be printed:
Code digits price in Euro (22), substring from PLU (0815), price (total).
1
Barcode structure no. e.g. 02
Pr210
02
1

Define barcode format

Submenu 01
Pr210
2
Barcode types
01
10002
0= EAN 13; 1= code 128
2
3 4
3
Height of barcode
00= Barcode height is taken from PR550/02, Pr555/07 or from BLD layout.
4
OCR line
0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed.
5
Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel

Define code digits (Field 1)

Submenu 02 (code constant)
5
e.g. 22 for price code in Euro according to
GS1 Germany

22
02

C 18 LI H-

Define substring (Field 2)

Submenu 03 (numeric code)
Pr210
6
Numeric code
03
05040
05= Substring from e.g. 110/05 (PLU):
6
7
8
or 215/ 02 (Non-PLU weighed)
or 215/ 03 (Non-weighed articles)
or 215/ 04 (Minus articles)
or 215/ 05 (Total)
7
Number of digits for field 2
04= four digits for constant
8
Conversion of variable values
0=If in Numeric code <05>= part string was selected, <0> must always be enetered
for the conversion of the variable values.

7 - 20

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Instore code EAN 13

Define price barcode (Field 3)

Submenu 03 (Numeric code)
9
Numeric code (encoded value)
01= price
10

Number of digits for field 3

06= 6 digits for the price

Conversion of variable values

0= Decimal places as per device setting

Pr210
03

01060
9

Check and adopt code structure

Confirm submenu 04

10 11

Pr210
04
C 302 L11

confirm

H-

Assign instore code code structure e.g in Pr 215/ 05 (total)

Code digit for barcode type

0= Instore code

Barcode structure no. e.g. 02

The code structure is saved in Pr 210 under
this number.

Constant is freely selectable

e.g. 4-digit article no. 0815
The number of digits depends on the
number of digits for the part string 7 .

The remaining digits are without meaning,

but must be assigned.
Input: 000000

Scale check digit

13 14

Pr215
05
0 02 0815000000

Fig. 65: Printout example for instore code

EAN 13

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 21

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Instore code EAN 13

Example:

Pr110
In-store code for a PLU no.
05
0 02 0815 000000
Printing of the barcode depends on the setting in the barcode structure.

6-digit coded value without check digit

Field 1: 2 digits for code constant

e.g. 22 for price code in Euro

Field 2: 4 digits for part string

e.g. article number 0815

Field 3: 6 digits for coded value

e.g. price 0022, 14

Scale check digit

Fig. 66: Example of EAN 13 in-store code

without check digit

5 digit coded value with check digit

Field 1: 2 digits for code constant

e.g. 22 for price code in Euro

Field 2: 4 digits for part string

e.g. article number 0815

Field 3:1 digit check digit

for encoded value

Field 4: 5 digits for coded value

e.g. price 022, 14

Scale check digit

Fig. 67: Example of EAN 13 in-store code

with check digit

7 - 22

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Code 128

Code 128
Code 128 contains the information in the dashes and spaces. The dash widths and the
width of the spaces vary, depending on the code content.
ASCII characters from ASCII 0 to ASCII 127 can be represented. This includes the
character set A, B and C. The specifications of code 128 can be found in Directive EN
799.
The length of the code is variable.
Menu setting
- Pr 210/ structure number/ 01, 02, 03
Create code
- Pr 210/ 04
Check digit and save if valid
The structure of Code 128 is defined in Pr 210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03.
The code constant is defined in Pr 210/ 02.
The encoded values are selected in Pr 210/ 03, see page 7 - 59.
_______________________________________________________________________
Several encoded values can be set in a row, to do so re-call
submenu 02 or 03.
_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 23

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Code 128
Example: Code structure for code 128 with 6 fields
Any number of fields

1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 68: Text (Field 1), Selling price (Field 2), PLU no. (Field 3), Weight (Field 4), Unit price
(Field 5), Department number (Field 6)
Menu

Input example

Note

Printing in field

Pr 210

Code structure number

Operating procedure:
Enter the code structure no. e.g. 10 after menu
access
Confirm code structure no.
Confirm submenu 01
Enter barcode format, e.g. 1000
Confirm barcode format
Confirm submenu 02
Enter code constant, e.g. ABCDEF

Pr 210
10
Pr210
01
Pr210
01
1000
Pr210
02

ABCDEF
02

C 14 LI H-

Pr210
03
Pr210
Confirm submenu 03
03
01040
Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 01040 (price)
Pr210
04
Confirm input
Confirm constant

Submenu 4 is displayed
Select submenu 03 again
Press <3>

Pr210
03

Pr210
03
12030
Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 12030 (department no.)
Pr210
04
Confirm input
Confirm submenu 03

Confirm submenu 04

l
04

C 291 L11

H-

Confirm input
The code structure is checked and adopted if valid.
If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure
must be re-entered from the beginning.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 25

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Code 128
Example:
Create structure for barcode 128
in Pr 210
The following barcode is to be printed:
Text, price, PLU no., weight, unit price, department no..
1
Barcode no. e.g. 10

Pr210
10
1

Define barcode format

Submenu 01
Pr210
2
Barcode types
01
1= Code 128; 0= EAN 13
3
Height of barcode
00= Barcode height is taken from Pr550/02 or Pr555/07.
4
OCR line
0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed.
5
Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel

Enter text (Field 1)

Submenu 02 (code constant)
5
e.g. ABCD

Price (Field 2)
Submenu 03 (Numeric code)
6
Numeric code
01= price
7
Number of digits for price
04= four digits for price
8
Conversion of variable values
0= Decimal places as per device setting

PLU no. (Field 3)

Submenu 03 (numeric code)
6
Numeric code
06= PLU no.
7
Number of digit for PLU no.
04= four digits for PLU no.
8
Conversion of variable values
0= as per device setting

7 - 26

10002
2

ABCD
02

C 16 LI H-

Pr210
03

01040
6

Pr210
03

06040
6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Code 128

Weight (Field 4)
Submenu 03 (numeric code)
6
Numeric code
02= Weight
7
Number of digits for weight
04= four digits for weight
8
Conversion of variable values
0= as per device setting

Unit price (Field 5)

Submenu 03 (numeric code)
6
Numeric code
08= Unit price
7
Number of digits for unit price
04= four digits for unit price
8
Conversion of variable values
0= as per device setting

Department no. (Field 6)

Submenu 03 (numeric code)
6
Numeric code
12= Department number
7
Number of digits for department number
03= three digits for department number
8
Conversion of variable values
0= as per device setting

Check and adopt code

Confirm submenu 04
confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr210
03

02040
6

Pr210
03

7
08040
6

Pr210
03

12030
6

Pr210
04
C 115 L19 H-

7 - 27

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Code 128
Assign barcode

e.g. in Pr 110/PLU no./ 05

Code digit for barcode type

0= Instore code

Barcode no e.g. 10
The structure of Code 128 in Pr 210 is saved
under this number.

Part string in example not used. Therefore

the remaining digits are without meaning.
Input: 0000000000

Scale check digit

Pr110
05

0 10 0000000000

1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 69: Example of Code 128 with 6 fields

7 - 28

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

7.9

Programming

Traceability marker

Traceability text
Information about the origin of a product e.g. beef is is entered into
Pr 110/PLU number (9900 to 9999)/ 10.
The PLU number 9900 equals traceability number 00. PLU number 9902 equals origin
number 02 etc.
The traceability text is saved under the manufacturer number, which is printed in addition
to the PLU text.
1
Traceability text
2

PLU text

2
1

Fig. 70: Traceability text

Traceability no.
The traceability number is allocated to a product in during the sale.
There are 2 types of allocation:
1.
2.

Manual input of traceability number when a PLU is called up.

Automatic traceability no.

Program traceability data for manual input

Create text of origin

Pr110/PLU number (9900- 9999)/ 10

Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-1999)/ 09 -1

1= with data of origin

Setting traceability marker

Pr 515/03 -1
1= manual traceability marker,

Program traceability data for automatic traceability number

Create text of origin

Pr110/PLU number (9901-9999)/ 10

Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-9999)/ 09 -1

1= with data of origin

Setting traceability marker

Pr 515/03 -2
2= automatic traceability marker,

Define automatic traceability no.

PR515/04 -01
(01-99)

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 29

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

By-Count

7.10

Overview of By Count article definition

By Count articles are piece goods in a package. The number of pieces per package is
defined.

By Count and fixed weight database configuration

The By Count article type must be started up with Pr 606.
_______________________________________________________________________
All article data are deleted during setting database
configuration.

Back up your data before database configuration.

_______________________________________________________________________
Menu setting
- Pr 606/ 07 -11xx
By Count and fixed weight on.
- Pr 606/ 08 - 81
Start database configuration
The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.

By Count piece goods

General settings
Menu setting
- Pr 515/ 08 -0
or
- Pr 515/ 07 -1
goods

7 - 30

Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16.

Mandatory input number of pieces for all By Count piece

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
By-Count

Create By Count piece goods in a PLU

The selling price per package refers to the unit price and the set number of pieces per
package.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -3
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)

Unit price input (price per package)

By Count piece good type
Number of pieces per package

The price per piece is also to be printed. If back calculation is activated, the price per
piece is determined and additionally printed.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -0
Without back calculation
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -1
Wit back calculation The price per piece is
back-calculated from the package unit price and the number of pieces.
The number of pieces must always be entered for the called By Count article in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0
Without mandatory input number of pieces
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -1
With mandatory input number of pieces
Overwriting the selling price must be permitted in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -1 With price overwriting

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 31

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Fixed weight

7.11

Create overview of fixed weight

The stored fixed weight for the article is used for the price calculation instead of the
weighed weight.
Fixed weight
General settings
Menu setting
- Pr 515/ 08 -0
or
- Pr 515/ 08 -1

Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19.

Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles

7
Define fixed weight in a PLU
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -1
-

Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4

Pr 110/PLU no./17

Unit price input (price per fixed weight)

Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib
Unit price referring to 100g or 1/4 Lib
Type fixed weighed
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)

The fixed weight should always be entered for the called product in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0
Without mandatory input Fixed weight
or
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight
Overwriting the unit price should be permitted in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1
With price overwriting

7 - 32

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
By Count fixed weight

7.12

Overview of By Count fixed weight

In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight.
By Count fixed weight
General settings
Menu setting
Mandatory input of fixed weight
- Pr 515/ 08 -0
Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19.
or
- Pr 515/ 08 -1
Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles

Mandatory entry of quantity

Pr 515/ 08 -0
Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16.
or
Pr 515/ 07 -1
Piece Mandatory input for all By Count articles

Define By Count fixed weight in a PLU

Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
or
- Pr 110/ 08 -1
-

Unit price input (price per package)

Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 Lib

Pr 110/ 07 -5
By Count fixed weight type
Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package
Pr 110/ 17
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)

The fixed weight should always be entered for the called article in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0
Without mandatory input Fixed weight
or
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight
The number of pieces must always be entered for the called article in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0
Without mandatory input number of pieces
or
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 16 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight
Overwriting the package price must be permitted in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1
With price overwriting

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 33

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

VAT

7.13

Overview VAT

VAT only for ticket and multi-user operation.

If you define the VAT on the scale, please proceed as follows:

Switch on VAT in setting into operation, see page 7 - 138.

Pr606/ 07 -111
VAT on
Pr606/ 88 - 81
The values set are adopted.
The settings paper (Pr505) and operation (Pr510) need to be re-programmed.

Print incl. VAT yes/no, see page 7 - 95.

Pr520/ 10 -1
Print
Pr520/ 10 -0
No print

Create VAT rates 1 to 5, see page 7 - 69.

Pr230
VAT number 1-5
Pr230/ 01
Define VAT rate
Pr230/ 02
0= VAT incl.
1= VAT excl.
Pr230/ 03
VAT text

A VAT number for all articles yes/no, see page 7 - 71.

Pr231/ 03
0= Use VAT from article
1-5 = Use a VAT for all articles
If a VAT number (1-5) is assigned to all articles, the VAT from article is ignored.
Overwriting is not possible.

Assign VAT to articles, see page 7 - 48.

Pr110/ PLU-Nr./ 20
VAT number 1-5
Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 - 1
The VAT can be overwritten.
Pr215/ 09
VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles
Pr215/ 10
VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles
Pr215/ 11
VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles

7 - 34

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
VAT

7.13.1

Assign VAT to PLU

Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07
- Pr 230
- Pr 231/ 03 -0

VAT is activated
The VAT rate is created
The VAT is used from PLU
Pr

Call up menu
Select menu

Pr110

000001

The PLU number is displayed.

confirm
Select submenu

Pr110
20

Confirm

Pr110
20
1

Enter VAT number

Pr110
20
2

Confirm
The VAT rate from the VAT number 2 has now been assigned to PLU1.
Submenu 21 is displayed.

Pr110
21

confirm
<1> press

Pr110
21
1

The VAT in PLU can now be overwritten with a different VAT, see page 6 - 28.
Exit menu

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 35

Programming

7.14

Operating instruction BC II

Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00)

Up to 6 devices can be connected in a scale network (system). Two scales can be

connected directly via the EDP connector. Several scales are connected with a switch.
For scales with a 30 kg weighing range, please ask your Bizerba consultant.
Continuous operation in system possible. With Continuous operation a ticket can be
transmitted to any scale and printed in multi-operator mode. Data maintenance is also
possible.

Process Continuous operation

Registration is done on a scale. Further registrations by the same operator can be done
on all scales within the system. With key <Total> and operator key, e. g. <OP1> the ticket
can be closed on any scale on the system. The items and the total are then printed.
The following must be observed during continuous operation:
Prerequisite
- All scales must run on the same program version (Pr 716 / 09).
- All scales must be equipped with a dot-seven display.

Menu setting
-

The Database configuration (Pr 606) must be set equally on all scales.

Each scale within the scale must have an own network IP address (Pr 600)
All scales need to have the same Multicast address (Pr 607/ 02).
All scales need to have the same port number
( Pr 607/ 03 ) ( Pr 607/ 04 ).
One scale must be set as master scale (Pr 607/ 01 - 9).
Only one scale must be set as master.
The other scales need to be set as slaves (Pr 607/ 01 - 1).
The operating mode must be set to multi-operator mode (510 /01 - 01).

_______________________________________________________________________
Scales in multi-operator and price labeling mode participate in
master data supply (Pr510 01). Continuous operation cannot be run
on scales in price labeling mode.
Continuous operation
multi-operator .

only

supported

operating

mode

Master data maintenance only possible on master scale.

Sales can only be viewed, printed and deleted on the master scale.
_______________________________________________________________________

7 - 36

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming

System set-up
During system set-up, e.g. when switching on the scales, the slave scales show the
current system condition as scrolling message. The scales cannot be operated during this
time.
System conditions with slave scales
If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling
message on the display.
-

Scale Network off

Scale not entered in system yet.

Scale Update
Update of system data running.

If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master
data from master scale are stored.

_______________________________________________________________________
It is absolutely necessary that you wait until all scales have
been entered into the system.
If one of the above mentioned messages appear on the display of a
slave scale and sales is continued on the other scales at the same time,
synchronization of this slave scale is re-started, this means a scale
update is started again.
This functionality may cause that the respective slave scales can no
longer be integrated in the system network.
_______________________________________________________________________

System identification
If a device has been entered into the system,
the arrow 1 flashes in the display .

0,000

Arrow flashes = Slave scale in system.

Arrow flashes every second= master scale in system.

0,00

Arrow is dark = stand-alone scale.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 37

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Take scale out of a system

A scale in the system is to run as a single scale.
+

Press<Ctrl> and hold pressed,

then press <Up arrow>.
WAIT appears on the display
and the scale starts booting.

0,000

0,00

_______________________________________________________________________

Sales data and ticket memory are deleted.

_______________________________________________________________________
The scale can be operated as stand-alone scale.
If the scale is to be integrated in the system again, switch on and off scale again.
The sales data and the ticket memory are cleared and overwritten with the system network
data.

7 - 38

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
PLU maintenance 1--

7.15

PLU maintenance menu Pr 1--

Create, change or delete article (PLU).

Up to 6000 articles (PLU) can be defined.
_______________________________________________________________________
The number of articles (PLU) depends on the settings in memory
management Pr 606. Standard setting is 2000 PLU.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Define PLU

Pr 110

Print article (PLU) lists

Pr115

Delete article individually

Pr 120

Delete article from to

Pr 121

_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 39

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

PLU maintenance 1--

7.15.1

Create PLU (article)

.......................................................

Pr 110

All data related to a article is saved in the PLU no., e.g. text unit price, tare, etc. ...
Select 110
Pr110
_____9
Enter PLU number
(1 to 6000)
Confirm

Enter submenu

Pr110
01

Confirm
Pr 110 submenu overview:
01= Unit price
02= Product group
03= Tare
04= Shelf-life days
05= Barcode
06= Price overwriting
07= Article type
08= Weight class
09= Data of origin
10= PLU article text
11 = Supplementary text 1 - 4
12= Supplementary text 1 - 10 for BLD text fields
13= Logo print in BLD logo fields 1-3
14= Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes
15 = Unit price back calculation for the By Count operating modes
16= Mandatory input of pieces
17= Fixed weight
18= Fixed weight mode
19= Mandatory input of fixed weight
20= VAT number
21= VAT can be overwritten
22= Tare %

7 - 40

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
PLU maintenance 1--

Unit price input

_______________________________________________________________________
The price/kg depends on the unit price entry (110/PLU no./01) and
the set weight class (110/PLU no./08).
_______________________________________________________________________
Example:
Weight class
1kg
100g

Unit price input

25,80
25,80

Price/kg
25,80
258,00

7
Submenu

Enter unit price

Pr110
01
0025,80

Save

Product group
Submenu

Enter product group

Pr110
02
0001

0000-9999 Product groups are possible.

save

Tare
Submenu

Enter tare in gram

Pr110
03
0,002

Save
_______________________________________________________________________
Article tare is country-dependent.
_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 41

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

PLU maintenance 1--

Use-by date
The sell-by date is only printed on labels.
If entry smaller 900 (< 900) the text best before is printed on the label.
With entry 900 the text Use until instead of best before is printed.
E.g. for minced meat the packaged on date and the use-by date would then be the same.
With an input of 901, the use-by date is 1 day later than the packaged on date, etc..
The shelf life days are added to the packed dates. The resulting sell-by date is printed. If
000 is entered, no shelf-life date is printed.
Submenu 04
Pr110
04
900
Enter shelf-life

Shelf-life t 900 = Printing shelf-life

Shelf-life y 900 = Printing use-by date
save

Barcode for article

Prerequisite
for printing the barcode, see page 7 - 15
Submenu

Enter 13 digits for barcode

save
1

2
3

0= In-store code (EAN 13 or Code 128)

1= Manufacturer code
Code structure number

Pr110
05
0010815000000
1

Substring (free entry) is defined in Pr 210/

03
The in-store code must be filled with
000000.

7 - 42

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
PLU maintenance 1--

Price overwriting
The stored unit price for an article can be changed in sales (overwritten), see page 6 - 16.
Submenu 06
Pr110
06

Enter selection

0 = Overwriting a unit price is not permitted

1= Overwriting a unit price is not permitted
Save

7
Article type
Submenu

Enter article type

Pr110
07
0

save

Article types
0= weighed - The selling price of an article is calculated from the weight.
1= non-weighed
- The price does not depend on the weight. The selling price of the
article is the unit price that is entered.
2= minus -The unit price of the article is a minus amount in sales e.g. for
deposit on bottles.
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07 -11
or
- Pr 606/ 07 -10
or
- Pr 606/ 07 -01
-

By Count and fixed weight on.

Only By Count valid
Only fixed weight valid

Pr 606/ 08 -81
Start Database configuration
The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.

_______________________________________________________________________
All article data are deleted during database configuration.
Back up your data before database configuration.
_______________________________________________________________________
3= By Count - the price relates to pieces per package.
4= Fixed weight
5= By Count fixed weight - fixed weight and price relate to pieces per package

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 43

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

PLU maintenance 1--

Weight class
_______________________________________________________________________
The price/kg depends on the unit price entry (110/PLU no./01) and
the set weight class (110/PLU no./08).
_______________________________________________________________________
Submenu

Pr110
08
0

Enter weight class

0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb depending on country option

1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb depending on country option

save

Data of origin
Traceability data can be allocated to a PLU no.
Prerequisite
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 10
The data e.g. birth, slaughter, cutting, etc. has to be defined, PLU no. 9900 - 9999,
see page 7 - 29.
Submenu

Pr110
09
0

Enter selection
0= without data of origin
1= with data of origin
save

PLU article text

Submenu

Pr110
10
C 500 LI H-

Enter article text

Example:
S

Enter PLU article text, see also page7 - 9.

Start test print

salami is printed
save

7 - 44

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
PLU maintenance 1--

Supplementary text 1-4

Prerequisite
Ticket
- Pr 550/ 13 -1
-

Release print of supplementary texts.

Label
Pr 555/ 16 -______1

Release print of supplementary texts.

1 to 4 supplementary texts can be printed in addition to the PLU article text.

The supplementary texts have to be available in Pr 200.
Submenu

Pr110
11
_-_________

Enter 1,2,3 or 4

Pr110
11
1-000000000

Confirm

Pr110
11
1-_________

IEnter text number

from Pr 200

Pr110
11
1-______ 101

Confirm

Supplementary text 1 - -10 for BLD text fields

BLD= Bizerba Label Designer.
Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts.
In the design of labels in BLD, different text fields can be defined.
A text from Pr 200 can allocated to these text fields in the scales.
Prerequisite
- Pr 555/ 01 -00
Label layout from BLD.
- Pr 555/02 -09
Select BLD label number
- Pr 606/ 03 -0 to 10 Release BLD text fields
Submenu

Enter text feld number

1-10
Confirm
Enter text number from Pr200

1= with back calculation
The unit price per piece or the fixed weight per kg is calculated.
Save

By Count: Mandatory input of pieces

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr110
16

0 = no mandatory input
1= with mandatory input
Save
The number of pieces per pack must always be entered in the sale.

By Count: Fixed weight

Submenu

Enter fixed weight for a package

Pr110
17
000560

000000 - 999999
Save

By Count: Fixed weight mode

Submenu

Enter mode

Pr110
18

0= Standard
1= lboz (g)
2= oz (lboz)
3= oz (g)
4= oz (lb)
save
A second representation of the unit is printed in brackets.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 47

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

PLU maintenance 1--

Mandatory input of fixed weight

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr110
19

Pr110
20

0 = no mandatory input
1= with mandatory input
save
The fixed weight must always be entered in sales.

VAT number
Submenu

Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07
- Pr 230
- Pr 231/ 03 -0

VAT is activated
The VAT rate is created
The VAT is used from PLU

Enter VAT number

1-5 = VAT number
save

The selling price of the selected PLU is calculated with the VAT entered.

VAT can be overwritten

also see page 6 - 28
Submenu 21
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07
- Pr 230
- Pr 630
- Pr631/ 03

VAT is activated
The VAT rate is created
A VAT key must be created
re-programmed keyboard is set

Enter selection
0= VAT cannot be overwritten

Pr110
21

1= VAT can be overwritten

save

7 - 48

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
PLU maintenance 1--

Tare % (dependent on country)

If tare % is entered, the tare value increases in parallel to total weight in percent. If e.g. a
PLU tare is entered, it is added to percent tare. The total tare is deducted from total
weight. Only the net weight is caluclated.
Example: An article has a PLU tare of 2 grams and a percent tare of 10%.
If the article has a weight of 1000 grams the 2g PLU tare + 10% percent tare are
deducted. The display shows the tare weight of 102 g and the net weight of 898g.
If the same article has a weight of 1500g the display shows a tare weight of 152g and a
net weight of 1348g.
Submenu

Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07

7
Permit tare %

Enter the tare % of the article.

save

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr110
22

000,00

7 - 49

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

PLU maintenance 1--

7.15.2

Print PLU (article) lists

....................................................

Pr115

Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 4.

Print all PLUs
Select 115

Pr115
01

Confirm

Pr115
01
000001-999999

confirm

Pr115
01
000001-______

Confirm
All programmed PLUs are printed.
Print PLU selection
Submenu 01 and 02
Enter submenu
01 = Print PLU selection with all article lines
02= Print PLU selection with first article line only
confirm
Enter start PLU no.
Confirm start PLU
Enter first PLU no.

Pr115
01

Pr115
01
000001-999999
Pr115
01
_____1-999999
Pr115
01
000001-______
Pr115
01
000001-____ 12

Confirm the end PLU no. and start printing

PLU 1 to 12 are printed.

7 - 50

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
PLU maintenance 1--

7.15.3

Delete PLU (article) individually

Select 120

......................................

Pr 120

Pr120
000015

Enter article (PLU) number

Confirm
PLU 15 is deleted.

7.15.4

Delete PLU (article) from - to

Select 121

........................................

Pr 121

Pr121
_____1-000000

Enter start PLU no.

Pr121

000001-______

Confirm
Pr121
Enter first PLU no.

000001-____ 10

Delete
PLU 1 to 10 are deleted.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 51

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance 2--

7.16

Data maintenance Menu Pr 2--

Define supplementary texts and allocate to a text number.

Define barcode structure.
Make non-PLU settings. Non-PLU are articles that are not stored in the scales.

_______________________________________________________________________

Define supplementary texts

Pr 200

Create header and footer notes text

Pr 201

Create scrolling message

Pr 202

Print out texts

Pr 205

Delete texts

Pr 206

Define barcode structure

Pr 210

Create barcode structure

Pr 211

Non-PLU settings

Pr 215

BLD label list / print logo lisr

Pr 220

Delete BLD labels / logos

Pr 225

Maintain VAT

Pr 230

Manage VAT

Pr 231

_______________________________________________________________________

7.16.1

Define supplementary texts

.............................................

Pr200

An arbitrary text is created and stored in Pr 200. Each text is given a text number. This text
number can, for example, be allocated to a PLU product.
500 text numbers may be defined.
Example:A supplementary text is saved in Pr 200 under the text number 10.
In Pr 110/ PLU no./11 is where this number is entered, causing this text to be printed in
addition to the PLU article text.
Select 200

Pr200
_______10

Enter text number

Confirm
Enter text

Pr200
C 1500 LI

H-

see page 7 - 9
Confirm

7 - 52

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Data maintenance Pr 2--

7.16.2

Create header and footer notes text

...............................

Pr 201

In Pr201 header and footer notes are created centrally. Each header and foot note text is
saved under text number.
A header or footer text is printed when one of these text numbers are entered at:
Ticket in Pr 550/ 04 and 05.
-

Labels in Pr 555/09.

Select 201

Pr201
10

Enter text number

1 - 99
Confirm
Enter header or footer text
see page 7 - 9

l
C 500 LI H-

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 53

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance 2--

7.16.3

Create text of scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 202

Select 202

Pr202
10

Enter text number

01 - 99
Confirm

Enter scrolling message text

For text input, see page 7 - 9

C 500 LI

H-

Confirm
The output can be changed with control characters:
&Z;= Display character-by-character
-

&W;= Display word-by-word (standard)

&Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)

&Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)

Control characters can be entered in the text at will. The control character influences the
subsequent text. Always place a < ; > after the control character.
_______________________________________________________________________
Scrolling message settings for the scale in Pr 516.
_______________________________________________________________________

7 - 54

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Data maintenance Pr 2--

7.16.4

Print texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr205

Prerequisite
- Ticket paper is in the printer
- Pr 505 -0
Paper type Ticket paper is set
Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 5.
Select 205
Enter submenu

Pr205
01

01= Print supplementary texts

02= Print header and footer texts
03= Print scrolling message
Confirm

Pr205
01
0

Starting to print
The stored texts are printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 55

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance 2--

7.16.5

Delete supplementary texts amd header/foot texts

Select 206
Enter submenu

........

Pr206

Pr206
01

01= Delete supplementary text from Pr 200 individually.

02= Delete all supplementary texts from Pr 200.
03= Delete single header and footer text from Pr 201.
04 = Delete single scrolling message text from Pr 202.

Confirm

Delete supplementary text individually

Submenu 01
Enter text number from Pr200
1-999999999

Pr206
01
______101

Confirm
The text with text number 101 is deleted.

Delete all supplementary texts

Submenu
Enter 90

Pr206
02
90

Confirm
All supplementary texts in Pr 200 are deleted.

Delete header and footer texts

Submenu

Enter text number from Pr201

Confirm
Enter text number from Pr201

Pr206
03
_2 - 00
Pr206
03
02 - 15

Confirm
Header and footer text with the text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted.

7 - 56

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Data maintenance Pr 2--

Delete scrolling message texts

Submenu
01-99

Enter text number from Pr202

Confirm
Enter text number from Pr202

Pr206
04
_2 - 00
Pr206
04
02 - 15

Confirm
Scrolling message texts with text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 57

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance 2--

7.16.6

Define barcode structure

.................................................

Pr 210

In Pr 210 the structure of the instore code EAN 13 and the code structure for code 128 is
created.
_______________________________________________________________________
Examples for
- Barcode structure code 128 see pge 7 - 23
- Barcode structure instore code EAN 13 see pge 7 - 18.
_______________________________________________________________________

Structure for Code 128 and EAN 13

Select210
Submenu
01= Define barcode format
02= Enter code constant
03= Select numeric code
04= Check code structure and save

Enter structure number

Pr210

01 - 99
1
Structure number e.g. 02

02
Pr206
01

Confirm structure number

Confirm submenu

Create barcode format

Pr210
01

Submenu 01
2
Barcode types
0= EAN13
1= Code 128
3
Height of barcode
00= Barcode height is taken from
PR550/02 or Pr555/07.
05 to 22 = Barcode height in mm
4
OCR line
0= OCR line is printed
1= OCR line is not printed
5
Module width 2 or 3 Pixel
Confirm

10002
2

Fig. 71: Example with OCR line

7 - 58

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Data maintenance Pr 2--

Enter code constant

Submenu

Confirm

l
02

C 20 LI H-

Text and numeric input of up to 20 characters is possible for Code 128.

Text input see page 7 - 9
For EAN 13, only numbers with up to 12 digits are possible.
Confirm

7
Select numeric code
Submenu

Confirm
1

Pr210
03

01050

Encoded values
1
2
3
01= price
02= Weight
03= No. of pcs.
04= Foreign currency
05= Part string from PLU Starts after 4. digit after the code structure number
06=PLU number
07= Middle check digit Input 07000
Only for EAN 13. middle check digit possible on pos. 6,7 or 8.
08= Unit price
09= Foreign currency unit price
10= Tare
11= Device number, see Pr 605
12= Department number, see Pr 604
13= Operator no.
14= Scale number, see Pr 603
15= 313 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128
16= 131 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128
Number of digits
01 to 10 digits

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 59

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance Pr 2-3

Conversion of variable values

0= Decimal places as per device setting
1= Decimal places are cut off No rounding occurs.
2= There is a cutoff after the first decimal place. No rounding.
3= After the second decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding.
4= After the third decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding.
5= Floating comma only for EAN 13.
The code digit (e.g. 22 for price) is increased by the number of omitted digits. The
increased code digit means that during scanning of the barcode the number of
digits and position of the comma are established.
6= The value to be coded is multiplied by 10
7= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 10.
8= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 100.
9= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 1000.

Brief example: Define code structure for Code EAN 13 (12digits required)
Pr 210
05
Create structure number e.g. 05
Pr 210/ 01
00002
(EAN 13 with OCR)
Pr 210/ 02
21
Constant e.g. 21 (2 digits)
Pr 210/ 03
Pr 210/ 03
Pr 210/ 03

06040
07000
02050

PLU number (4 digits)

Middle check digit (1 digit)
Weight with (5 digits)

Pr 210/ 04

<enter>

Check and save structure

Constant

2 digits

PLU number

Middle check digit 1 digit

Weight

Automatic check digit of the scale

4-digits
5 digits

Fig. 72: Example of barcode

7 - 60

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Data maintenance Pr 2--

Check and adopt code structure

Submenu

04
Confirm

Pr210
04
C 337 LI

H-

Check code structure by printing out

<Press> shift and hold,

then<press> total.
The entered code is printed.

Fig. 73: Print code structure

Check code structure in display

Decimals as configured
04
C 337 L8 H-

<Press scrolling.
The entered code is displayed line by line
confirm
The code structure is checked and adopted if valid.
If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code
structure must be re-entered from the beginning.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 61

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance 2--

7.16.7

Administer barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211

Select 211

Pr211
01

Enter submenu
Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Print code structures

02= Delete code structures

03= Code structure number for all PLU
04= Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position
05= Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position

Print code structures

Submenu 01

Pr211
01

Confirm

The saved barcode structures are printed

Structure number

Barcode format

Field 1 code constant

4
5

Content field 1
Field 2 part string from PLU

No. of digits for field 2

Field 3 price

No. of digits for field 3

Conversion of variable values

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8 9

Fig. 74: Barcode structures

Delete code structures
Submenu 02
Enter first code number e.g. 1
confirm
Enter code number., e.g. 10.

Pr211
02

_1-00

Pr211
02

01- 10

confirm
Code numbers 1 to 10 are deleted.

7 - 62

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Data maintenance Pr 2--

Code structure number for all PLUs

Submenu 03
The same barcode structure is assigned to all PLUs.
Enter code number

Pr211
03

00= Take code structure number from PLU

Pr 110/ 05
01-99 = Code structure number is used for all
PLUs.

Confirm
All articles (PLU) are printed out with barcode structure no. 11.
The barcode structure is set in Pr 210.
Module width
Bars and spaces of a barcode have a standard pixel width. The readability of a rotated
printed barcode can be improved by using a larger pixel width.
Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position
Submenu 04
Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position .
Enter module width

Pr211
04

0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01).

2, 3= Use module width generally. Ignore module width from code structure.
Confirm
Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position
Submenu 05
Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position .
Enter module width

Pr211
05

0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01).

2, 3= Use module width generally. Ignore module width from code structure.
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 63

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance 2--

7.16.8

Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215

Select 215
Pr215
01
Enter submenu
Confirm

Submenu overview:
01= Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)
02= Barcode for non-PLU weighed articles
03= Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)
04= Barcode for non-PLU minus article
05= Barcode for total
06= Product group for non-PLU weighed
07= Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)
08= Barcode for non-PLU minus article
09= VAT for non-PLU weighed
10= VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)
11= VAT for non-PLU minus article

Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

Submenu 01
Prerequisite
- Pr 555/ 05 -01 or 11 Release print of sell-by date on label
_______________________________________________________________________
Date representation depends on the setting in Pr 500/04.
_______________________________________________________________________

Enter date

Pr215
01
190508

e.g. 26.04.2007
If 000000 is entered, no date is printed.
Save

7 - 64

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Data maintenance Pr 2--

Prerequisite
For ticket
- Pr 550/ 01
For labels
- Pr 555/ 06

Release print of barcode

Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles

Submenu 02
Enter 13 digits for the barcode

Pr215
05
0020000000000
1

Save
1

2
3

0= In-store code (EAN 13 or Code 128)

1= manufacturer code
Code structure number
Substring (free input)
The number of digits is dependent on the number of digits for the substring. The
number is defined in Pr 210/ 03.
The in-store code must be filled with 000000.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 65

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance 2--

Product groups for non-PLU weighed articles

Pr215
11
1

1 - 5 VAT numbers are possible

Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 67

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance 2--

7.16.9

BLD label list / print logo list

Select 220
Enter submenu

...........................................

Pr220

Pr220
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:

01= Print BLD label list

02= Print logo list

Print BLD label list

Submenu

01
Pr220
01
0

Confirm
The list of BLD labels stored in the scales is printed.

Print logo list

Submenu

02
Pr220
02
0

Confirm
The list of BLD logos stored in the scales is printed.

7.16.10

Delete BLD labels / logos

Select 225
Enter submenu

................................................

Pr 225

Pr225
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Delete BLD labels
02= Delete BLD logos

7 - 68

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Data maintenance Pr 2--

Delete BLD labels

Submenu 01
Enter BLD label no.

Pr225
01
01-00

Confirm
Enter BLD label no.

Pr225
01
01- 03

Confirm
The selected labels are deleted.

Delete BLD logos

Pr225
02
0001-0000

Submenu 02
Enter BLD logo ID
Confirm

Pr225
02
0001- 0003

Enter BLD logo ID

Confirm
The selected BLD logos are deleted.
Example, see page 7 - 7

7.16.11

Define VAT

Select 230

.......................................................................

Pr230
1

Enter VAT number

1-5
Confirm
Enter submenu

Pr 230

Pr230
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Define VAT rate
02= Incl. or excl. VAT
03= VAT text

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 69

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Data maintenance 2--

Define VAT rate

also see page 7 - 34
Submenu 01
Enter tax rate in %, e.g. 19%
0-99

Pr230
01
19,00

Confirm

Incl. or excl. VAT

Submenu

Incl. or excl. VAT

0= Incl. VAT
1= Excl. VAT

Pr230
02
0

Confirm

VAT text
Submenu

Enter text

Incl. 19%
03
C20 LI

H-

Confirm
A VAT rate is created. Up to 5 different VAT rates can be created.

Esc

Press<ESC>

230

The next VAT number is displayed.

Confirm
The next VAT rate (no.2) can be defined.

7 - 70

2
Pr230
01

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Data maintenance Pr 2--

7.16.12

Manage VAT

......................................................................

Select 231

Pr 231

Pr231
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Printing list with VAT data record

02= Deleting VAT number

03= General VAT

Printing VAT list

Submenu

Confirm

Pr231
01
0

List with defined VAT rates is printed.

Deleting VAT number

Submenu

Enter VAT number

1 to 5
Confirm
Enter VAT number
1 to 5

Pr231
02
1-0

Pr231
02
1-3

Confirm
The data records of VAT numbers 1,2 and 3 are deleted.

Same VAT for all articles

Submenu 03
Enter VAT number

Pr231
03
2

0= Use VAT from PLU and Non-PLU

1 - 5= Use same VAT for all articles
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 71

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Reports Pr 3--

7.17

Reports menu Pr 3--

_______________________________________________________________________
Configure report layout

Pr 300

Print reports on ticket

Pr 310

Print report on label

Pr 311

Display / delete sales

Pr 320

_______________________________________________________________________

7.17.1

Configure report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300

Select 300
Enter submenu

Pr 300
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Printing prices
02= Printing PLU without sales
03= Printing customer title for PLU report (Pr 310/ 02 and 03)
04= Printing customer title for product groups report (Pr310/ 04)
05= Printing customer title for operator report (Pr310/ 05)
06= Printing customer titles for scales overall sales (Pr311/ 01) and overall sales operator
report (Pr310/ 05)
07= Printing customer title for origin data report (Pr 310/ 06 and 07)
08= Printing customer title for VAT report (Pr310/ 08)

Printing prices
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr 300
01
0

0= Prices are not printed

1= Prices are printed
Confirm

7 - 72

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Reports Pr 3--

Printing PLU without sales

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr 300
02
0

0= PLUs without sales are not printed

1= PLUs without sales are printed
Confirm

Customer title for reports

Submenu 03 to 08
New report title (customer title) are created in Pr 201.
Assign text number of a title to report, e.g. 03.
Enter text number

Pr 300
03
01

01-99 Text number from Pr 201.

00 Print Standard title..
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 73

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Reports Pr 3--

7.17.2

Print reports on ticket

......................................................

Pr310

The reports can either be printed or printed and deleted.

_______________________________________________________________________
Please note configuration of report layout Pr 300, see page 7 - 72.
_______________________________________________________________________

Select 310
Enter submenu

Pr 310
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Scale report
02= PLU report with an article text line
03= PLU report with an article text lines
04= Product groups report
05= Operator report
06= Data of origin - sales report with one traceability text line
07= Data of origin - sales report with all traceability text lines
08= VAT sales report

Scale report
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr 310
01
0

0= Print or delete reports

1= Print or delete report
Starting to print
Reports on PLU, operators, product groups and traceability data are printed.

7 - 74

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Reports Pr 3--

PLU report with one product text line

Submenu

Pr310
02
0

Enter selection
0= Print or delete reports
1= Print or delete report
Starting to print
PLU report with one article text line is printed.

PLU report with all article text lines

Submenu

Pr310
03
0

Enter selection
0= Print or delete reports
1= Print or delete report
Starting to print
The PLU report is printed with all article text lines.
1

Unit price

Sales volume of this PLU

Overwrite PLU unit price.

Number of registration

Sold quantity

Product group

PLU article number

PLU text

*
6

Fig. 75: PLU article report

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 75

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Reports Pr 3--

Product group report

Submenu

Pr310
04
0

Starting to print
The product group report is printed.

Sales for this product group

Number of recordings

Sold quantity

Product group number

4
3

Fig. 76: Product group report

7 - 76

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Reports Pr 3--

Operator report
Submenu

Pr310
05
0

Enter selection
0= Print or delete reports
1= Print or delete report
Starting to print
The operator report is being printed.
1

Sales of operator 1

Number of sales deletions

Operator no.

7
3

The operator report documents 2 how often

scale sales have been deleted before the
current report.

Fig. 77: Operator report

Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text line

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr310
06
0

0= Print or delete reports

1= Print or delete report
Starting to print
The report on traceability data sales is printed with one traceability text line.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 77

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Reports Pr 3--

Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text lines

Submenu

Pr310
07
0

Enter selection
0= Print or delete reports
1= Print or delete report
Starting to print

The report on traceability data sales is printed with all traceability text lines.

In the traceability data sales report, the traceability data is printed with the number of sold
items and sold weight.
1
Number of sold items
2

sold weight

Traceability text

Traceability no.

Fig. 78: Traceability data sales report

7 - 78

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Reports Pr 3--

VAT sales report

Submenu

Pr310
08
0

Enter selection
0= Print or delete reports
1= Print or delete report
Starting to print
1

The VAT sales report is printed.

Incl. VAT

Excl. VAT

VAT text

VAT rate

VAT number

5
1
4

Fig.: 79: VAT sales report

7.17.3

Print report on label

........................................................

Select 311

Pr311

Pr311
0

Starting to print
The scale's total sales are printed.

Scale number

Total sales of scale

Number of sales deletions

Fig. 80: Total sales report

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 79

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Reports Pr 3--

7.17.4

Display / delete sales

.......................................................

Pr320

Pr320
01

Select 320
Enter submenu
01= Display overall sales of scales
02= Delete sales
Confirm

7
Display sales
Submenu

Pr320
01

Confirm

364,15

The scale's total sales are displayed.

Delete sales
Submenu 02
_______________________________________________________________________
The overall sales of scales is completely deleted!
_______________________________________________________________________

Enter 90

Pr320
02
90

Confirm
The total salesof the scales is deleted.
The deletion is being booked, see page 7 - 79.

7 - 80

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18

Device Configuration Menu Pr 5--

_______________________________________________________________________
Setting date and time

Pr 500

Select type of paper

Pr 505

Setting main operating mode

Pr 510

Setting switching operating mode

Pr 510

Settings for different operating modes

Pr 515

Scrolling message settings

Pr 516

Settings for multi-operator mode

Pr 520

Settings for quick-operator mode

Pr 521

Settings for price labeling mode

Pr 525

Configure operator keys with operator no.

Pr 530

PLU input mode and range limitation

Pr 535

Print out PLU direct keys

Pr 536

Tare fixed value memory

Pr 540

Rounding and price calculating settings

Pr 545

Create ticket and release printout of barcode

Pr 550

Create labels and release printout of barcode

Pr 555

Labels configuration management

Pr 556

Foreign currency settings

Pr 560

_______________________________________________________________________

7.18.1

Setting date and time

.......................................................

Select 500
Enter submenu

Pr500

Pr500
01

Article
Submenu overview:
01= Setting date
02= Setting time
03= Print year number either 2 or 4-digit
04= Date presentation

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 81

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Setting date
Submenu

Enter date
Input DDMMYY
The sequence is dependent on the setting in submenu 04

Pr500
01
190508

Save

Setting time
Submenu

Enter time
Input hhmm

Pr500
02
0908

Save

Print year number with either 2 or 4 digits

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr500
03
0

0= Year with 2 digits

1= Year with 4 digits
Save

7 - 82

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Date representation
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr500
04
00

Save
Input in
Pr 500/ 01

Print
Example

Day-Month-Y ear numeric

DDMMYY

21.07.06

Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric

DDMMYY

21July 06

Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric

DDMM

21July

Month-Y ear alphanumeric

MMYYDD

July 06

Month-Day-Y ear American numeric

MMDDYY

07.21.06

Month-Day-Y ear American alphanumeric

MMDDYY

July 21.06

Year-Month-Day Hungarian numeric

YYMMDD

06.07.21

Year-Month-Day Hungarian alphanumeric

YYMMDD

06July 21

Day-Month-Y ear numeric

DDMMYY

21-07-06

Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric

DDMMYY

21-July-06

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 83

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18.2

Select type of paper

.........................................................

Select 505

Pr 505

Pr505
0

Enter selection
0= Ticket paper
1 = Label paper (only possible for label printer)
Confirm

7
7.18.3

Setting main operating mode

Pr510

2 operating modes can be set simultaneously.

The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511.
Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination
<Shift>+ <ESC>.
Select 510
Enter submenu

Pr510
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01 = Select main operating type
02= Select layout
03= Addition of customer total

7 - 84

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Select main operating mode

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr510
01
01

Save
01= Multi-operator mode
02= Self-service mode
03= Quick-service mode
04= Price labeling with manual triggering
05= Price labeling with automatic start

Select layout
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr510
02
0

0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper)

1= Label layout
Save

Addition of customer total

Only effective on labels.
Example: A customer buys several articles. One label is created per article Afterwards a
total label is created
The total is printed if with addition has been set.
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr510
03
0

0= without addition of customer total.

1= with addition of customer total.
Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 85

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18.4

Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr511

2 operating modes can be set simultaneously.

The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511.
Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination
<Shift>+ <ESC>.
Select 511
Enter submenu

Pr511
01

7
Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Select switching operating mode
02= Select layout
03= Addition of customer total

Select switching operating mode

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr511
01
02

Save
01= Multi-operator mode
02= Self-service mode
03= Quick-service mode
04= Price labeling with manual triggering
05= Price labeling with automatic start

Select layout
Only effective for operating modes that allow ticket and label
layout e.g. multi-operator mode.
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr511
02
1

0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper)

1= Label layout
Save

7 - 86

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Addition of customer total

Only effective on labels.
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr511
03
0

0= without addition of customer total.

1= with addition of customer total.
Save

7
7.18.5

Settings for different operating modes

Select 515
Enter submenu

...........................

Pr515

Pr515
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Automatic zerosetting.
02= Open tickets / labels
03= Traceability marker
04= Automatic traceability number.
05= Negative customer total permitted or not permitted.
06= Determination of sales.
07=Complusory entry for By Count piece
08= Complusory entry for fixed weight

Automatic zerosetting
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr515
01
0

0= Scale is reset (within the limits for automatic zerosetting).

1= Zerosetting error 115 is displayed, when the weight value is below zero.
2= Scale is not set to zero.
Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 87

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Open tickets / labels

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr515
02
0

0 = open tickets are printed.

After switching on the scales, open tickets are automatically printed.
1= open tickets are not printed and not deleted.
If open tickets exist after the scales have been switched on, they have to be finalized
(<Total> <OP>).
Save

7
Traceability marker
also see page 7 - 29
Submenu 03
Enter selection

Pr515
03
0

0= Traceability marker is off.

1= Enter traceability no. manually.
2 =Use defined traceability no.
Save

Define traceability number

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr515
04
35

00-99 = defined traceability no.

Save
All articlse (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text
that is stored under the defined traceability number.

Negative customer total

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr515
05
1

0= Customer total cannot become negative.

1= Customer total can become negative.
Save

7 - 88

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Sales calculation
To create the reports ( Pr310 and Pr 311), the sold items have to be added in the total
memory.
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr515
06
1

0= Sold items are not added to the total memories.

1 = Sold items are added to the total memories.
Save

Compulsory entry for By Count pieces

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr515
07
1

0 = Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/16

1= Compulsory entry for By Count piece
Save

Compulsory entry for fixed weight

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr515
08
1

0 = Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/19

1= Compulsory entry for fixed weight and By Count fixed weight
Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 89

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18.6

Scrolling message settings

Select 516
Enter submenu

............................................

Pr 516

Pr516
01

Confirm

1= Fix tare value
2= Fix unit price and tare value
Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 91

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Print article and total label

Prerequisite
- Pr510/02 -1
or
- Pr 511/02 -1
Submenu

Label layout is set

Pr520
02
0

Enter selection

0= Print article and total label

1= Only print total label
2 = Only print article label
Save
0= Print article and total label
The article label is printed when an article is registered.
The total label is printed if the <Total> and e.g. <OP1> keys are pressed.
1= Only print total label
The article is registered but not printed when an operator key, e.g. <OP1> is pressed.
The total label is printed if the <Total> and e.g. <OP1> keys are pressed.
2 = Only print article label
The article label is printed when an article is registered.
The total is displayed if the <Total> and e.g. <OP1> keys are pressed.
_______________________________________________________________________
The number of items is printed on the total label.
The customer total () is only printed, if addition of customer total
is set in Pr510/03 -1 or Pr511/03 -1
_______________________________________________________________________

7 - 92

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Operator items display

Submenu

Enter selection
1
Display for sheet cancellation
2

Display after recording

Display for total/subtotal

Pr520
03
001
1

0= inactive
1 = active

Save
Example:
The operator number OP 1 and the
number of registered items Po 2
appear in the display.

Cash functions
Submenu

Total
OP 1 Po 2

[1]

2,54

Pr520
04
0

Enter selection
0= Check-out draw does not open; registration is always permitted
1= Cash register opens after pressing keys <Total> and<operator>.
You can register when the check-out drawer is open.
2= Cash register opens after pressing keys <Total>
and<operator>.
You can register when the check-out drawer is open.
3= Cash register opens after pressing keys <Total> and<operator>.
You cannot register when the check-out drawer is open.
4= Cash register opens after pressing keys <Total>
and<operator>.
You cannot register when the check-out drawer is open.
Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 93

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Payment in/out
Prerequisite
- Pr 550/ 12- 1
Submenu

Printout payment in/out

Pr520
05
0

Enter selection

0= without payment in/out

1= Payment in/out with a currency
2= Combined payment in/out in local currency and foreign currency *
Save

Talon print-out
also see page 6 - 25
Submenu

Pr520
06
00

Enter selection
00= without talon
01-99 = with talon, the entered number corresponds to the delay time in seconds.
Save

Repeat ticket
The complete and printed ticket can be printed again.
also see page 6 - 26
Submenu

Pr520
07
0

Enter selection
0= without repeat ticket
1 = with repeat ticket
Save

Open ticket again

also see page 6 - 26
Submenu 08

Pr520
08
0

Enter selection
0= without ticket reopening
1 = with ticket repening
Save

7 - 94

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Print cancellation and canceled articles

also see page 6 - 26
Submenu 09
Enter selection
0 = without printing of cancellation and canceled articles
1 = with printing of cancellation and canceled articles

Pr520
09
0

Save

Printing included VAT

also see page 7 - 34

Submenu 10
Enter selection
0= no printing included VAT
1= Printing included VAT

Pr520
10
0

Save

Print ticket if requested

also see page 6 - 25
Submenu 11
Enter selection
0= Print ticket as requested (<Shift> +<OP>)
1= Print ticket always

Pr520
11
0

Save
_______________________________________________________________________
Customer ticket can be switched off
The scale offers the option of suppressing printout of the customer
ticket.
According to EC regulation 90/384/EEC for non-automatic scales,
the customer is entitled to a receipt in order to check the sales
transactions in accordance with Appendix 1, No.14.
Suppression of the customer ticket should therefore only be activated
if you are sure that there is no customer requirement for printout of a
customer ticket.
_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 95

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18.8

Settings for multi-operator mode

Pr 521

Description, see page 6 - 4

_______________________________________________________________________
To ensure that the settings in Pr 521, it is absolutely necessary to set
the operating mode multi-operator mode.

Pr 510/ 01 -03 Quick-service mode

_______________________________________________________________________
Select 521
Pr521
Enter selection
1
0= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, registration with the Operator key.
1= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, registration is automatic.
Confirm

7 - 96

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18.9

Settings for price labeling mode *

...................................

Pr525

_______________________________________________________________________
To ensure that the settings in Pr 525, it is absolutely necessary to set
the operating mode multi-operator mode.
Pr 510/ 01 -04Price labeling with release by hand
or
Pr 510/ 01 -05Price labeling with automatic start
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 525
Enter submenu

Pr525
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Labeling mode
02= Piece price multi- label printing

Labeling mode
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr525
01
0

0= Price labeling
Label printing with sales price 0.00 is not supported.
Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight.
Batch total label with number of items and batch price.
1= Weight labeling
Label printing with sales price 0.00 is supported.
Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight.
Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. *
2 = Weight labeling only
Label printing with sales price 0.00 is supported.
If only the weight should be printed on the label, the unit price has to be 0.00.
Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. *
Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 97

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Piece price multiple label printing

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr525
02
00

00= Labels are printed one after the other without delay.
01 - 99 = Delay time in seconds. Labels are printed consecutively with delay.
Save

7 - 98

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18.10

Configure operator keys with operator no.

Select 530

.....................

Pr530

Pr530
__ - ___

Enter key number (1-16)

Pr530
02 - 002

Confirm

7
Pr530
02 - 020

Enter operator number (1-999)

Save

7.18.11

PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535

Select 535
Enter submenu

Pr535
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input
02= PLU input: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad.
03= PLU-direct key mode
04= PLU-direct key allocation
05= PLU-range limitation
06 = Delay time for PLU no. input

10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr535
01
0

0 = Entering the unit price via ten-key keypad.

Switch to PLU no. input by pressing the <Switch> key.
1 = PLU-no. entry via ten-key keypad.
Switch to unit price input by pressing the <Switch> key.
2 = It is only possible to enter the PLU no. with the ten-key keypad and not the unit price.
Confirm
6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 99

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

PLU entry: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad.

Submenu

02
Pr535
02
6

Enter selection
2= PLU no. input with 2 digits
3= PLU no. input with 3 digits
4= PLU no. input with 4 digits
5= PLU no. input with 5 digits
6= PLU no. input with 6 digits

Confirm

PLU direct key mode

Submenu

03
Pr535
03
0

Enter selection

0= No range limitation: The PLU direct key no. corresponds to the PLU article number.
With range limit:
The PLU direct key no. calls the PLU article number
allocated by the limit, see submenu 05.
1= PLU-direct keyboard is locked.
PLU call-up is only possible with the ten-key keypad.
2= The PLU direct key no. calls the individually allocated PLU article numbers,
see submenu 04.
The range limit only applies for PLU no. call-up via the ten-key keypad.
Confirm

PLU direct key allocation

Prerequisite
- Pr 535/ 03 -2

PLU article no. is taken from the PLU direct key allocation.

An article (PLU no.) can be allocated to any PLU direct key.

Submenu

Enter PLU direct key no. (001-246)

Pr535
04
019 - 000019

Confirm
Enter PLU article number (0-999999)

Pr535
04
019 - 000001

Confirm
The allocated PLU article number is called up with the PLU direct key.

7 - 100

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

PLU range limitation

_______________________________________________________________________
The PLU range limit does not affect the PLU direct keys where the
setting is Pr 535/03-2.
_______________________________________________________________________
If only some of the articless stored on the scales are required, the articless on this set of
scales can be limited.
Example:There are 2000 articless stored on the scales.
Fruit articles from PLU 1 to PLU 100.
Cheese articles from PLU 101 to PLU 200.
Sausage articles from PLU 201 to PLU 800 etc.

Only cheese is supposed to be sold on the cheese scales.

The articless in the cheese scales are limited to articless 101 to 200.
This means the smallest range article number is allocated to PLU 1.
Submenu

05
Pr535
05
___101 - 999999

Enter the smallest PLU article no. in the range

Confirm

Pr535
05
000101 - ___200

Enter the largest PLU article number in the

range
Confirm
Article 101 is called up with PLU no. 1, and
article 200 with PLU no. 100.
Calls outside of the range are rejected.
W/o range limitation
Article number = PLU-No

With range limitation

PLU

Calling PLUs

PLU

Calling PLUs

Fig.: 81: PLU range limitation

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 101

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Delay time PLU no. input

If e.g. a 6-digit PLU no. input is expected, and only a 2-digit no. is input, the PLU is called
after the set delay time.
Submenu

Input time delay e. g.10

Pr535
06
10

00= The desired PLU is called up with <Enter> or after entering all digits.

00-20 =The desired PLU is called after the set delay time.
Confirm
The delay time value (01-20) is not specified in seconds.
1= small delay time;
20= large delay time.

7 - 102

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18.12

Print out PLU direct keys

.................................................

Pr536

Overview of the allocation of articles (PLU number) to the PLU direct keys.
Select 536
Pr536
0
Start printing
The PLU direct key list is printed.
Esc

Cancel print job.

PLU number

PLU direct key

Fig. 82: PLU direct keys

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 103

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18.13

Tare fixed value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr540

Select 540

Pr540
_ - ____
Pr540

Enter the tare direct key (1-4)

1 - 0000

Confirm

Pr540
Input assigned tare value

1 - 0002

Confirm

7.18.14

Rounding and price calculation settings for

national currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr545

Customer total and article total can be rounded off to the last 2 digits.
If a related text is required, this can be released for printing in Pr 550/07. The text has to
be defined in Pr 200.
_______________________________________________________________________
Rounding and price calculation settings are specific to country.
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 545

Pr545
01

Input submenu
Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Rounding of customer total
02= Rounding of article total
03= Rounding for By Count

7 - 104

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Rounding methods for customer total *

Submenu

Pr545
01
0

Enter selection
Confirm
0= no rounding
1= rounding to 5
2 = rounding to 10
3= rounding to 50
4= rounding to 100
5 = mathematical rounding to 5*
6= mathematical rounding to 10*
7= mathematical rounding to 25*
8= mathematical rounding to 50*
9 = mathematical rounding to 100*

Rounding of article total

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr545
02
0

Confirm
0= no rounding
1= rounding to 5
2 = rounding to 10
3= rounding to 50
4= rounding to 100
5 = mathematical rounding to 5*
6= mathematical rounding to 10*
7= mathematical rounding to 25*
8= mathematical rounding to 50*
9 = mathematical rounding to 100*
Examples of rounding, see page 7 - 106.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 105

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5-Examples of rounding

Explanation

Setting
0

No rounding
Rounding to 5
The last digit is always 5 or 0.
Rounding to 10
The last digit is always 0:
Rounding to 50
The last digits are always 50 or 00.
Rounding to 100
The last digits are always 00.
Mathematical rounding to 5
The last digit is always 5 or 0.

1
2

Example

3
4

mathematical rounding to 10
The last digit is always 0:
mathematical rounding to 25
The last digits are always 00, 25,50 or 75.

mathematical rounding to 50
The last digits are always 50 or 00.

Mathematical rounding to 100

The last digits are always 00.

10.43 10.43
10.42 10.40
10.48 10.45
10.42 10.40
10.48 10.40
10.34 10.00
10.83 10.50
10.43 10.00
10.76 10.00
10.42 10.40
10.43 10.45
10.48 10.50
10.42 10.40
10.48 10.50
10.12 10.00
10.23 10.25
10.45 10.50
10.66 10.75
10.88 11.00
10.21 10.00
10.34 10.50
10.83 11.00
10.43 10.00
10.78 11.00

Rounding for By Count

Submenu

Enter selection
0 = mathematical
1 = round up next position

Pr545
03
0

Save

7 - 106

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.19

Ticket design overview

Information can be added, disabled or modified on the ticket.

Scale number
Enter Pr 603 scale number

1
17

16
2

3
4

Ticket counter
Pr 550/10 - 1Ticket counter print
Operator number

7
8

Minus inpit,

Ticket total

key

4
5

Unit price
Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 unit price
Selling price
Tare
Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 PLU tare
Pr 550/ 03 Tare print-out
Non-weighed, key <Non-weighed>

3
15

Footer line zexz

Pr 201 Enter footer text
Pr 550/ 05 Footer text print-out
Barcode see page 7 - 15.
Pr 215/ 05 Totals barcode
Pr215/ 04 Barcode for non-PLU minus
Pr 110/ PLU number/ 05 PLU barcode
Pr 210/ Barcode structure for in-store code
Pr 550/ 01 Barcode print-out
Pr 550/ 02 Barcode height

Fig. 83: Ticket example

Item counter

PLU article text

Pr 110/PLU no./10
Enter PLU article text
Pr 550/ 8 Select font type
Pr 550/ 9 Number of article text lines to be printed

Time
Pr 500/ 02

Date
Pr 500/ 01 Enter date
Pr 500/ 03 Year number either 2- or 4-digit
Pr 500/ 04 Select date format

Department number
Pr 604 Enter number

Header text
Pr 201 Create header text
Pr 550 / 04 Print-out of header text

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 107

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.19.1

Create ticket

.....................................................................

Select 550
Enter submenu

Pr 550

Pr550
01

Confirm

Submenu overview:
01= Print barcode on ticket
02= Barcode height in mm on ticket
03= Print tare on ticket
04= Print header text
05= Print footer text
06= Print foreign currency supplementary text
07= Print rounding supplementary text
08= Font change on ticket
09= Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket
10= Ticket counter printout
11= Print foreign currency *
12 = Print amount paid in/out
13= Print supplementary texts
14 = Print header logo
15= Printout footer logo

Print barcode on ticket

Submenu

Enter selection
1
Article barcode
2

Totals Barcode

Talon barcode

Pr550
01
000
1

0= Do not print barcode on ticket

1= Print barcode
Save

Barcode height in mm on ticket

Submenu

Enter selection
5-22 mm

Pr550
02
17

Confirm

7 - 108

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Print tare on ticket

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr550
03
0

0= Do not print tare value on ticket

1 = Print tare value, net weight is marked.
(country-specific character) Germany = N.
2 = Print tare value, net weight is not marked.
Confirm

Print header text

Prerequisite
The header text has to be defined in Pr 201.
Requirements
The header text has to be defined in Pr 201.
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr550
04
01

00= no printout of header text

01-99 = Header text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 53.
Confirm

Print footer text

Prerequisite
The footer text has to be defined in Pr 201.
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr550
05
02

00= no printout of footer text

01-99 = Footer text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 53.
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 109

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Print foreign currency supplementary text

Submenu

Pr550
06
000000000

Enter selection

000000000= No foreign currency supplement. text

1-999999999= Foreign currency supplement. text number see Pr 200
Confirm

Print rounding supplementary text

_______________________________________________________________________
The rounding supplementary text is only printed if rounding has taken
place.
_______________________________________________________________________
Submenu

Pr550
07
000000000

Enter selection

000000000= without rounding suppl. text

1-999999999 = Rounding supplementary text number, see Pr 200
Confirm

Total

rounded total

Rounding text

1
3
2

Fig. 84: Example of rounding text

7 - 110

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Font change on ticket

Each article text was created with selected font. This PLU font is used for printing. (Text in
Pr 110/ PLU no./ 10).
A fixed and pre-set font can be defined for all print-outs. This font has priority over the
PLU font.

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr550
08
000

000= Font from PLU

001-1 10= fixed font. The font set in the PLU is ignored.

Confirm

Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr550
09
0

0= all text lines are printed

1-9 = the corresponding number of lines are printed
10 = text lines not printed
Confirm

Ticket counter printout

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr550
10
1

0= Counter is not printed

1= Counter is printed
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 111

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Print foreign currency

Submenu

11
Pr550
11
0000

Enter selection
1
Print conversion rate

Print unit price, selling price and total

Print selling price and total

Only print total

0= No printout
1= Printout
Save

Print amount paid in/out

Prerequisite
- Pr 520/ 05- 1 or 2

Printout payment in/out

Requirements
- Pr 520/ 05- 1 or 2

Printout payment in/out

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr550
12
0

0= No printout
1= Printout
Confirm

Print supplementary texts

Prerequisite
- Pr 110/PLU no./11
Submenu

Enter selection

Assign supplement. text to article

Pr550
13
0

0= No printout
1= Printout
Confirm

7 - 112

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Print header logo

Submenu

Enter logo ID

Pr550
14
__12

0000 = Do not print logo

0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID
Confirm
Header and footer logos can be created with Bizerba Label Designer and loaded onto the
scale.
Logos present in the scale can be printed out, see page 7 - 7.

Print footer logo

Submenu

Enter logo ID

Pr550
15
__12

0000 = Do not print logo

0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 113

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.20

Label design overview

Information can be added, disabled or modified on the label.

3
4

Label texts
Pr 555/ 16 Print release for standard or
alternative texts
Pr 555/ 20 and 21 Alternative texts
Sell-by date
Pr 555/ 05 Print
Pr 110/ PLU-Nr./ 04 shelf-life days
Pr 215/ 01 Non-PLU shelf-life days
Net weight
Selling price

11
2

10
1

1
9

3
1

8
7

Fig. 85: Example of label 43 mm

5
6
7

9
10

11
12

Unit price
Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 . . . .
Print price frame
Pr 555/ 16
Packaging date
Pr 555/ 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 500/ 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode
Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 05 . . . . . . . .
Pr 215/ 2; 3; 4; 5 . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator no.
Pr 555/ 17
PLU article text
Pr 110/ PLU-No/ 10 . . . . . . . . .
Pr 110/ PLU-No/11 . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logo printout
Pr 555/ 11
Header
Pr 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare
Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 . . . .
Pr 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/08-1- . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 - 114

PLU unit price

Release print
Enter date
Enter article barcode
Enter non-PLU barcode and total barcode
Release barcode print
Enter height of barcode

Enter article text

Assign supplem. text
Release print of supplementary texts
create beginning of text field
create beginning of data field
Set data field monitoring

Enter header text

Release print of header text
Enter PLU tare value
Enter tare value for the tare fixed value key
Release tare print

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

BLD labels
These labels are designed in BLD. The labels are issued a number and are sent to the
scales and stored there.
_______________________________________________________________________
Release BLD text fields and logo fields in database configuration
(memory management) Pr 606/ 3 and 4 see page 7 - 137
_______________________________________________________________________
1

Logo field 1

Text field 1

7
1

Fig. 86: Example of label layout in BLD

Allocate content for text field, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 12, on page7 - 45.
Allocate content for logo field, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 13, on page7 - 46
1

Allocated logo in logo field 1

Allocated text in text field 1

Fig. 87: Example of BLD label in the

scales

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 115

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.20.1

Create labels

Select 555
Enter submenu

....................................................................

Pr 555

Pr555
01

Confirm

Submenu overview:
01= Label type
02= Select BLD labels
03= Label size
04= Change label distance
05= Packaging and sell-by date on label
06= Barcode on label
07= Barcode height in mm on ticket
08= Tare printout on label
09= Print header text
10= Alternative text with sell-by date
11= Logo printout
12= Beginning of text field
13= Beginning of data field
14= Monitoring data field
15= Font change on label
16= Print price frame and texts on label
17= Print Operator no., Machine ID or Check Digit * on label
18= Print foreign currency
19= Layout turned by 180 (only with label paper) and reversing operation
20= Alternative text with packaging date
21= Alternative text with packaging date
22= Print units on the label
23= Print speed for label layout

7 - 116

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Label type
Submenu

Pr555
01
01

Enter selection

00= Label from BLD, see 555 / 02, only possible if BLD layouts are available
Label type
01= Bizerba label standard
02= Bizerba label layout 1
03= Bizerba label layout 2
034= Bizerba label layout 3

Width

x height H
58mm x43 mm
58mm x43 mm
58mm x43 mm
58mm x43 mm
B

05= ISB with barcode

06= ISB w/o barcode 50mm x48 mm

50mm x48 00

07= Small label with barcode

08= Small label w/o barcode
09= Small label w/o barcode
10= Bizerba label layout 4

33mm x47 mm
33mm x47 mm
37mm x 36 mm
58mm x38 mm

Confirm
Example:
B Label width
H

Label height
B

Fig.: 88:

Standard 01

Fig.: 89:

Small label 07

Enter distance

Pr555
04
16

8-40dot (8dot= 1mm)

Confirm

Packaged-on and sell-by date on label

Submenu

Enter selection
1
Packaging date
2

Sell-by date

Pr555
05
11
1

0= No printout
1= Printout
Confirm

7 - 118

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Barcode on label
Submenu

06
Pr555
06
11

Enter selection
1
Article barcode
2

Totals Barcode

0= No printout
1= Printout
Confirm

7
Barcode height in mm
Submenu

Pr555
07
15

Enter height of barcode

5-22 mm

Only effective for pre-defined labels.

Not effective with BLD labels.

Confirm

1
2

3
3

Fig.: 90: Barcode height

1
Beginning of text field
2

Beginning of data field

Barcode height

Tare printout on label

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr555
08
1

0= without tare printout

1 = with tare printout
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 119

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Print header text

Submenu

Pr555
09
01

Enter selection
00= Do not print header text
01-99 = header text number see Pr 201
Confirm
1
1

2
3

Header field
Logo
Header text

2
3

Fig. 91: Header field

Alternative text for sell-by date

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr555
10
000000010

000000000= No alternative text. Standard text is printed

1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200
Confirm

Logo printout
Submenu

Enter logo ID

Pr555
11
0007

0000= without logo

0001= Logo Kesko
0002= Logo Tuko
0003= Logo Eko
0004= Logo Sokos A
0005= Logo Sokos B
0006= Logo C
0007= Logo Recycling
Confirm

7 - 120

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Start of text field

Pr555
12
00

Submenu 12
Beginning of text field in mm

00= Text field 1 automatically starts 11 mm from top edge of label

11-84 = Beginning of text field in mm from top edge of label
Confirm

Start of data field

Pr555
13
00

Submenu 13
Beginning of data field in mm

00= Data field is automatically positioned at the bottom edge of the label
11-84 = Beginning of data field 2 in mm from top edge of label
Confirm

Example of label fields

1
Start of text field
2

Beginning of data field

Data field

1
2

Label height

3
4

Fig. 92: Label fields

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 121

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Data field monitoring

Data field monitoring prevents the text field being pushed into the data field.
Pr555
Submenu 14
14
0
Enter selection
0 = no data field monitoring
1= Data field monitoring is on
Confirm

Example: 3 supplement. texts were assigned to article Calf's liver The supplementary
texts are not printed in the setting Data field monitoring activated, as printing is in the
data field.

1
2

5
5
3

Fig. 93: Data field monitoring on

Beginning of text field

Beginning of data field

Data field

Article and supplementary texts

7 - 122

no data field monitoring

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Font change on label

A font can be defined for all print-outs. This font has priority over the PLU font.
Pr555
Submenu 15
15
001
Enter selection
000= Font from PLU
001-1 10= fixed font
Confirm

Print price frame and texts on label

Submenu

Print out standard text, e.g. Tare

Print standard text e.g. Packaged or

alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/
20)
Print standard text e.g. best before or
alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/ 10
and Pr555/ 21)
Print out standard text, e.g. Net or piece

Print out standard text, e.g. Price

Print out price frame

Printout of supplementary texts

Pr555
16
1111111
1

0= No printout
1= Printout
Save

Print operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label

Submenu 17
Enter selection

Pr555
17
0

0= without output
1 = with operator no.
(no. input in Pr 530)
2 =with machine ID (no. input in Pr 605)
3= with digit code *
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 123

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Print foreign currency

Submenu

Print conversion rate

Print unit price, selling price and total

Print selling price and total

Only print total

Pr555
18
1100
1

0= No printout
1= Printout
Confirm

180 rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only)

Submenu 19
Enter selection
1
1= Print layout rotated by 180
2

1= Reverse label before printing

Pr555
19
11
1

0 = No rotation and no reverse operation

1 = Layout is printed rotated by 180; label is reversed before printing
180 Rotation
For labels with pre-print turned by 180

Fig.: 94: Example no rotation

7 - 124

Example turned layout

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Reverse operation for standard labels

With labels the height of the header field can be of different sizes
Therfore, the header on the following label cannot be pre-printed.
The label must be withdrawn to the label start before commencing printing (reverse
operation).
If a header text has been defined, this will be printed after reversing.
If no header text has been defined, the header text area can be used for the article text.
If the label has a header field height of 10 mm, reversing is not necessary.
Reversing in the case of BLD labels
During the creation of freely programmable labels with the PC program Bizerba Label
Designer, whether or not reverse operation is used for printing is defined.
The reversing function must be selected in the BLD project.
If reverse operation is selected, all fields, e.g. article or barcode, can be placed in the
header area. The layout is printed after reversing.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 125

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Alternative text for packaged-on date

Submenu

Enter text number

Pr555
20
000000010

000000000= No alternative text print

1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200
Confirm

Alternative text for use-by date

Submenu

Enter text number

Pr555
21
000000000

000000000= No alternative text print

1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200
Confirm

Print units on the label

Submenu

Enter selection
1
Print price with unit
2

Print unit price with unit

Print weight with unit

Print tare with unit

Pr555
22
1111
1

0= Do not print
1= Print unit
Confirm

Print speed for label layout

Submenu 23
The print result can be improved if the print speed is reduced
Enter selection
00= 44 mm/s
01= 53 mm/s (e.g. for battery operation)
02= 66 mm/s
03= 88 mm/s
04= 102 mm/s (Standard)

Pr555
23
04

Confirm

7 - 126

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.20.2

Labels configuration management

.................................

Pr 556

All label settings in Pr 555 can be stored in Pr 556/01.

Prerequisite
- The layout memory has to be deleted.
- Pr 556/ 03
Clear layout memory

Select 556
Enter submenu

Pr556
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Save configuration from Pr 555
02= Select label configuration
03= Delete label configuration

Save configuration from Pr 555

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr556
01
1

1= Layout memory 1
2= Layout memory 2
3= Layout memory 3
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 127

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Select label configuration

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr556
02
0

0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing

1= Configuration from layout memory 1
2= Configuration from layout memory 2
3= Configuration from layout memory 3
Confirm

7
Delete label configuration
Delete from memory x to memory x
x = Layout memory 1-3
03

Pr556
03
1-1

Enter selection

Pr556
03
2-1

Submenu

Confirm
Enter selection

Pr556
03
2-3

Confirm
The label configuration in memories 2 and 3 is deleted.

7 - 128

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.20.3

Foreign currency settings

...............................................

Select 560
Enter submenu

Pr 560

Pr560
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01 = Select foreign curreny function
02= Select foreign/ second currency display
03= Foreign currency calculating mode
04= Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout
05= Foreign currency characters on label for price field
06= Decimal places of foreign currency
07= Foreign currency factor
08= Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)
09= Rounding of foreign currency

Select foreign currency function

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr560
01
0

0= Euro/foreign currency off

1= Foreign currency function on
2= Euro function on (only possible for non-Euro devices)
Confirm

Select foreign/ second currency display

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr560
02
0

0= Foreign currency display off (Euro or foreign currency key non-functional)

1= Foreign currency display on
Display unit and selling price, total and/or subtotal and
total in payment in/out mode
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 129

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Foreign currency calculation method

Enter selection

Pr560
06
2

0- 3= Decimal places in foreign currency

Confirm

7 - 130

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Device Configuration Pr 5--

Foreign currency factor

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr560
07
0

0= factor 1
1= factor 10
2= factor 100
3= factor 1000
4= factor 10000
Confirm

Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr560
08
0001,00

e.g. 0001.01
Confirm

Rounding of foreign currency

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr560
09
0

0= no rounding
1= rounding to 5
2 = rounding to 10
3= rounding to 50
4= rounding to 100
5 = mathematical rounding to 5*
6= mathematical rounding to 10*
7= mathematical rounding to 25*
8= mathematical rounding to 50*
9 = mathematical rounding to 100*
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 131

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21

Database configuration menu Pr 6--

_______________________________________________________________________

TCP-IP settings

Pr 600

Display current IP address

Pr 601

Print out of communication settings

Pr 602

Setting scale number

Pr 603

Setting department number

Pr 604

Setting machine ID

Pr 605

Database configuration

Pr 606

Setting scale for system (continuous operation)

Pr 607

Control display lightning

Pr 610

Turn-of f time of scale

Pr 615

WLAN settings

Pr 621

Beeper on/off

Pr 622

Sensitivity of scale

Pr 625

Change key function

Pr 630

Keyboard selection

Pr 631

RAM clearing

Pr 666

Enter password for menu

Pr 690

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings

Pr 695
_______________________________________________________________________

7.21.1

TCP-IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr600

Select 600
Enter submenu

Pr600
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= DHCP
02= Display of current scale IP address
03= IP: IP address if no DHCP selected
04= Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected
05= Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected
06= DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected
06= DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected
08= Host name: A name can be assigned to the scale. 32 ASCII characters are possible.
09= Leasing address: Display of IP address that has been assigned to the scale by the
DHCP server.

7 - 132

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

DHCP

Pr600
01
0

Submenu 01
Enter selection

0= no DHCP, use fixed IP address

1 = Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server.
The leasing address has been requested, see Pr 600/09.
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
If the DHCP server does not assign the requested leasing address,
set the leasing address to 000000000000 in Pr 600/09.
The DHCP server can then assign the scale a new address.
_______________________________________________________________________

Display of current scale IP address

Submenu

Pr600
02
172017168010

DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr600
06
010001001100

Enter 12-digit number without point, e.g. 10.1.1.100 would be 010001001100

Confirm

DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr600
07
010001001101

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 10.1.1.101 would be 010001001101

Confirm

Host name:
Submenu

Enter name .
32 ASCII characters are possible.

Pr600
08
C32 LI H-

Confirm

Leasing address
Display and input
The scales are assigned an IP address (leasing address) by the DHCP server. To do this,
DHCP has to be switched on, see Pr 600/01-1.
If the scales are switched off, the assigned address remains reserved for a certain time. If
the displayed leasing address is not changed, the scales request this address again from
the DHCP server after being switched on. By entering 000000000000 the DHCP server is
requested to assign a new address.
Submenu

Leasing address

Pr600
09
172017168008

Confirm

7 - 134

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21.2

Display current IP address

..............................................

Select 601

Pr601

Pr601
172017168010

7.21.3

Print out of communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr602

Select 602

Pr602

Confirm
The communication settings are printed out

Fig. 95: Communication settings

7.21.4

Setting scale number

...............................................

Select 603

Pr 603

Pr603
12

Enter scale number

01-32
Confirm

7.21.5

Setting department number

Select 604
Enter department number
001-999

.............................................

Pr604

Pr604
120

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 135

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21.6

Setting machine ID

...........................................................

Select 605

Pr605

Enter machine ID

1234

0001-9999
Confirm

7
7.21.7

Database configuration (memory management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 606

Text memory in the BC II is dynamic. These memories include texts and logos. Depending
on the request, either more or less memory can be released for PLU, texts, or ticket items.
If changing a value, e.g. number of PLUs, causes the remaining memory to be too small,
the entry is rejected. In this case, other values, e.g. number of BLD text fields have to be
reduced.
Select 606
Pr606
Enter submenu
01
Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= No. of PLUs
02= Number of supplementary texts per PLU
03= Number of BLD text fields per PLU
04= Number of BLD logo fields per PLU
05= Number of supplementary texts
06= Number of items (ticket memory)
07= By Count, fixed weight and VAT
08= Decimal places*
88= Start database configuration
Examples of valid database configuration
2000 PLU
4 supplementary texts per PLU
10 BLD text fields
3 BLD logo fields
500 general texts
1200 items
5000 PLU
3 supplementary texts per PLU
5 BLD text fields
2 BLD logo fields
1000 general texts
1200 items
7 - 136

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

No. of PLUs
Submenu

Enter selection
0100 - 6000

Pr606
01
2000

Confirm

Number of supplementary texts per PLU

Submenu

Enter selection
0-4

Pr606
02
4

Confirm

Number of BLD text fields per PLU

Submenu

Enter selection
0 - 10

Pr606
03
0

Confirm

Number of BLD logo fields per PLU

Submenu 04
Enter selection
0-3

Pr606
04
0

Confirm

Number of supplementary texts

Submenu

Enter selection
50 - 1000

Pr606
05
0500

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 137

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Database configuration Pr 6--

Number of items (ticket memory)

Submenu

Enter selection
50 - 1200

Pr606
06
1200

Confirm

By Count, fixed weight, VAT and tare %

See overview Define By count articles, page 7 - 30.

Submenu 07
Enter selection
1
1= By Count on

Pr606
07
1111

1= Fixed weight on

1= Activate VAT

1= Tare % approved
If tare % is approved, percentage value can be entered in Pr110/ 22.

2
3

0= off
1= on
Confirm

Decimal places*
*This menu is not valid for all countries.
Submenu 08
Enter selection

Pr606
08
2

0-3 = Number of decimal places

4= Country-dependent Standard value

Confirm

7 - 138

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

Start Database configuration

Submenu

Remaining available memory is displayed.

Pr606
88
375539

Enter selection

Pr606
88
____90

81 = RAM clearing is carried out and the set configuration values are saved. The scale
boots.
90= RAM clearing is carried out and the standard values are saved.
The standard values are specific to country.

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 139

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21.8

Setting scale for system (continuous operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 607

Continuous operation in system see page 7 - 36.

Function as of program version 2.00.
_______________________________________________________________________
Always note!
- There must be only one master scale in a scale system.
- Each scale within the system must have an own network IP
address (Pr 600)
_______________________________________________________________________

Select607
Enter submenu
01-04

Pr 607
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Scale type
02= Multicast IP address
03= Multicast port number
04= UDP Port number

Scale type
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr 607
01
1

0= standard scale (Stand alone)

1= Slave scale (system)
9= Master scale (system)
Confirm

7 - 140

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

System conditions with slave scales.

If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling
message on the display.
-

Scale Network off

Scale not entered in system yet.

Scale Update
Update of system data running.

If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master
data from master scale are stored.

Arrow in display flashes = Slave scale in system.

_______________________________________________________________________
If the system arrow flashes
scale.

, the device in the system is a master

_______________________________________________________________________

Multicast IP address
Submenu 02
The Multicast IP address indicates to which system the scale was assigned. Any address
within the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 can be assigned. All scales in one
system must have the same Multicast IP address.
Pr 607
02
239192000024
Enter address
Confirm

Multicast port number

Submenu 03
Basically the works setting must not be changed.

Work setting Multicast port number

Pr 607
03
06789

Confirm

UDP port number

Submenu 04
Basically the works setting must not be changed.

Works setting UDP port number

Pr 607
04
01031

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 141

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21.9

Control display lighting

...................................................

Select 610

Pr 610

Pr610
00

Enter selection
00= Display lighting can only be switched on or off manually.

01-99 = Time in seconds.

Display lighting is automatically switched on or off after the set time.
Confirm

Switch display lighting on manually:

Press and hold key<Shift>

then press key<Switching>.

The display lighting is switched on or off.

Automatic control of the display lighting:
After the last action performed on the scale, the display lighting switches off automatically
after a period of between 1 to 99 seconds.
Setting 01
Display off after approx. 1 second.
Setting 99
Display off after approx. 99 seconds
When another action starts on the scale, the display lighting is switched on again
automatically.
_______________________________________________________________________
When the display lighting is controlled automatically, the lighting can
still be manually switched off.
If the display lighting is switched off manually, the display lighting can
only be switched on again manually.
_______________________________________________________________________

7 - 142

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21.10

Turn-off time of scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr615

After a set time the scale is switched off, providing no key function or weight movement
takes place.
Prerequisite
A switch key as main switch.
With the on/off switch, the scale must be manually switched off.
Select615

Pr615

Enter selection

00= Scale is not turned off.

01-99 = Time in minutes, after which the scales are switched off, if no keys are pressed and
no weight movement has taken place.
Confirm

7.21.11

WLAN settings

Pr 621

Prerequisite
- A WLAN module must be integrated into the scale.
_______________________________________________________________________
Settings can only be made in submenus 02 to 07 if WLAN is
deactivated; 621/ 01-0.
If - 00000000 has been entered in 621/02, WLAN cannot be activated.
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 621
confirm

Pr621
01

Submenu overview:
01= Switch on WLAN
02= Time slices
03= Ping on/off
04= IP address of WLAN module
05= Test telegram on/off
06= IP address of telegram recipient
07= Port number of telegram recipient

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 143

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Database configuration Pr 6--

Activate WLAN
Submenu 01

Pr621
01
0

Enter selection
0 = WLAN off
1 = WLAN off
Confirm

_______________________________________________________________________
Procedure for WLAN activation:
- Deactivate WLAN 621/ 01 -0
- Make settings in submenus 02 to 07
- Activate WLAN 621/ 01 - 1

_______________________________________________________________________

Time slices
The time for which WLAN is to be active can be set.
Submenu

Enter time slice no. e. g. 1

0-3
Confirm
Enter start and end time
1
Start time e.g. 8 p.m.
2

Pr621
02
_ -________
Pr606
02
1 -00000000
Pr621
02
1 - ________
Pr621
02
1 -20000800

End e.g. 08.00 a.m.

Active for the whole day= enter 00010001.

Time slice inactive= enter 00000000.

Esc

Confirm

Pr621
02
_ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Press<ESC>

Pr621
02

You can now select submenu 3.

7 - 144

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

Ping on/off
If ping is activated, the scale sends a ping to the WLAN module at set time intervals.
Submenu

Enter time
Recommended setting 300 sec.

Pr621
03
_300

0000= Ping off

1-9999 = Ping on; time in sec. between 2 pings.
Confirm

7
IP address of WLAN module
The WLAN module is pinged by the scale, so that it always remains in active status.
Submenu

Enter IP address

Pr621
04
172017168001

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 is 172.17.168.1

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 145

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Database configuration Pr 6-Submenus 05, 06 and 07 enable functional diagnosis of the WLAN.

Test telegram on/off

A test telegram is periodically sent to a host.
Submenu

Enter time

Pr621
05
0900

0000= Telegram off

1-9999 = Send telegram on; time in sec. between 2 telegrams.
Confirm

7
IP address of telegram recipient
Submenu

Enter IP address

Pr621
06
172017168001

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 is 172.17.168.1

Confirm

Port number of telegram recipient

Submenu

Enter port number

Pr621
07
49152

1 - 65536
Confirm

7.21.12

Beeper on/off

Pr 622
Pr622

Enter selection
1
Regular beeper
2

Acceptance beeper

Error beeper

111
1

0= Beeper off
1 = Beeper on
Save

7 - 146

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21.13

Sensitivity of scale (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr625

The sensitivity setting regulates damping in the event of vibrations at the place of
installation (e.g. market operation).
_______________________________________________________________________
The higher the setting, the longer the time until standstill of the
display.
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 625
Enter selection

7
Pr625
0

0= Display sensitive (standard) with stable, vibration-free scale floor area

1
2

increasingly insensitive

..
5= Display insensitive to vibrations
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 147

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21.14

Change key function

Prerequisite
- Pr 631 - 03

........................................................

Pr 630

84-digit keyboard; must be set.

Pr630
0

Select 630
Pr630

_____

Press <Enter> key.

The function is active.
{

Press any key e.g.<PLU

50>.
The function code of this
key is displayed.

Pr630
32817

Enter new functional code

e.g.<33281> for fixed
tare 2.

Pr630
33281

Press <Enter> key.

The new key function is
saved.
Another key can be
modified.

Pr630
_____

Press <Mod>. The menu is exited.

_______________________________________________________________________
-

The function code of reserved keys e.g. <Mod>; <ESC>; <C> etc.
is not displayed and cannot be modified.

If <00000> is entered instead of a function code, the standard

function code becomes active.

In menu 630 all keys are reset to the standard function code with
<CTRL> and <9>.

_______________________________________________________________________

7 - 148

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

Overview of keyboard function code

Code
12
32768 - 33023
33024 - 33039
33280 - 33283
33344
33345
33346
33347
33348
33538
33539
33540
33541
33542
33543
33544
33546
33548
33580
33588
33589
34066
34069

7.21.15

Keyboard selection

Select 631
Enter
00=
01=
02=
03=

selection

Function
Paper feed
Direct PLU key 1 - 256
Direct operator key 1 - 16
Fixed tare key 1 - 4
VAT key 1
VAT key 2
VAT key 3
VAT key 4
VAT key 5
Tare
Subtotal
Total
Constant
Manual
Minus
Cancellation
Multiplication
Switch from PLU input to price input
Set scale to zero
Operator tare
Save operator tare
Date key
Print key

..........................................................

Pr631

Pr631
03

84-keyboard standard
84-keyboard with 24 self-service frame
84-keyboard with 30-front foil
84-keyboard reprogrammed. (e.g. keyboard changes from host)
Confirm
Keyboards, see page 5 - 7

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 149

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21.16

RAM clearing

....................................................................

Pr 666

Pr666

Select 666

00
Pr666
81

Enter 81
Confirm

RAM is cleared
_______________________________________________________________________
The following settings remain even after the RAM clearing:
-

Communication settings in Pr 600

Printer settings in Pr 710

Machine ID Pr 605

Database configuration (memory management). The values set in

Pr 606 are applied.

_______________________________________________________________________

7.21.17

Enter password for menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 690

PASS

Select 690
PASS
Enter password

000000

000000 = Password is deactivated

XXXXXX= Enter 6 numbers
Confirm
Password input is activated.
If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.

7 - 150

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21.18

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting

..............

Pr 695

Select 695
Pr695
01

Enter submenu
Submenu overview:
01= Change main currency to second currency (Euro)
02= Convert PLU price into EURO
Confirm

Change main currency to second currency (Euro)

Submenu 01
Pr695
01
0

Enter selection
0= Main currency in old local currency
1= Main currency in new local currency
Confirm

Convert PLU price into EURO

Submenu 02
_______________________________________________________________________
This function can only be called up if the old local currency is still
active.
Sales figures are not converted. Sales should be deleted.
_______________________________________________________________________
Pr695
02
1
Confirm
The prices are converted and the second currency is then changed to
automatically.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 151

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Service Pr 7--

7.22

Service menu Pr 7--

_______________________________________________________________________

Test print

Pr 700

Print boot log information

Pr 701

Print fonts

Pr 702

Print menu settings

Pr 703

Print weighing system information

Pr 704

Printer settings

Pr 710

Display ADC programming version

Pr 712

Display load cell type

Pr 715

Program version

Pr 716

Display battery voltage

Pr 717

Display test

Pr 718

Logbook control

Pr 730

_______________________________________________________________________

7.22.1

Test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700

Select 700
Confirm

Fig. 96: Test printing

7.22.2

Print boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701

Select 701
Confirm

Fig. 97: Example of log information

7 - 152

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Service Pr 7--

7.22.3

Print fonts

.........................................................................

Select 702

Pr702

Pr702
1

Print with ticket paper

Confirm
All fonts are printed.
Print with labels

Confirm
The first 4 fonts are printed.
Fig. 98: Fonts
Confirm
The next 4 fonts are printed.
Press the <Total> key as often as required until all font types have been printed.

7.22.4

Print menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr703

Select 703
Pr703
0
Confirm
The current menu settings are being printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 153

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Service Pr 7--

7.22.5

Print weighing system information

Select 704

.................................

Pr 704

Pr704
0

Confirm
Weighing system information is printed.

Fig. 99: Weighing system

information

7 - 154

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Service Pr 7--

7.22.6

Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710

Select 710
Enter submenu

Pr710
01

Confirm
Submenu overview:
01 = Feed for labels (+/- 1.5mm)
02= Move print format on the label (+/- 1.5mm)
03= Correct ticket feed (+/- 2.5mm)
04= Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket

Feed for labels

Submenu 01
Enter selection

Pr710
01
12

00-1 1= minus infeed

12= Standard settings
13-24 = plus infeed
Confirm

Move print format on the label

Submenu

Enter selection

Pr710
02
12

00-1 1= minus infeed

12= Standard settings
13-24 = plus infeed
Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 155

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Service Pr 7--

Correct ticket feed

Submenu

Pr710
03
20

Enter selection
00-19 = minus infeed
20= Standard settings
21-40 = plus infeed
Confirm

Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket

In the case of printers with light barriers (label printer) this is where sensitivity for
paper-end detection is set.
When the end of the paper is reached, printing is automatically interrupted and the display
shows the message PAPER END.
Submenu

Pr710
04
40

Enter selection
00= End of paper detection off
40= standard

increasingly insensitive

..
99= insensitive
Confirm

Change printing intensity

If the barcode is upside down the readability can be improved by reducing the printing
intensity.
Submenu

Enter selection

Pr710
05
0

0= no reduction
1= Reduce the printing intensity by 10%
2= Reduce the printing intensity by 20%
3= Reduce the printing intensity by 30%
Confirm

7 - 156

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Service Pr 7--

7.22.7

Display ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712

Select 712

Pr712
6026500004

7.22.8

Display load cell type

Select 715

.......................................................

Pr715
Cod

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr 715

150502

7 - 157

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Service Pr 7--

7.22.9

Display program version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 716

Select 716
Enter submenu

Pr716
01

Confirm

Pr716
01
00661117100140
Pr716
02
00061119500110
Pr716
03
00161117200140
Pr716
04
00061117300150
Pr716
05
00061117400140
Pr716
06
00061117500130
Pr716
07
00061117600110
Pr716
08
00061117700120
Pr716
09
61117000140

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Service Pr 7--

7.22.10

Display battery voltage

....................................................

Select 717

Pr717

Pr717
1
Pr717

confirm

12,218

_______________________________________________________________________
If the scale is connected to the mains, the supply voltage
(approx. 12 V) is displayed.
- Disconnect scale from mains.
The battery voltage is displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 159

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Service Pr 7--

7.22.11

Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718

Select 718

Pr718
1

Confirm
The display shows all figures and symbols.

Fig. 100: Display test

Close display test

7.22.12

Logbook control

Pr 730

In menu Pr 730, Welmec information from the logbook can be queried.

Pr730
01

Enter submenu
01= Display logbook
02= Print logbook
Confirm
Display logbook
Submenu 01
Step 1

Software identification number. (Software ID)

Accessing information

Entries from installation are displayed in three steps.

Consecutive number of logbook entry,
Department number,
Component number.
Version number of the loaded software.
Date and time of download.

7 - 160

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Service Pr 7--

Example: Accessing logbook entries

Press key<Mod>.
Press the keys <7> <3> <0> on
10-digit keyboard.

Pr730
01

Press key <Enter> .

Pr730
01
1

Press key Enter<>.

for step 1
1

Software ID

Version number of legally relevant part

Version number of legally non-relevant part

Pr730
A10F

002

0200

Press key Enter < for further steps.>

Serial number of the entry

Department number

Component number

Software ID

Version number of legally relevant part

Version number of legally non-relevant part

Date DDMMYY

Time

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr730
9
20
1

Pr730
A10F

002

0200

Pr730
140910
1

1058
2

7 - 161

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Service Pr 7-If there are further entries in the logbook, the next entry is displayed.

Serial number of the entry

Department number

Component number

Pr730
8
20
1

12
3

Pr730
bc 01 001 0170

Version number of the loaded software

Date

Time

Pr730
090410

1432

Hold down the <Enter>key until all logbook entries are displayed.
Once all entries are displayed, the scale shows the next submenu.
Pr730
02
Print logbook
Requirement
- Ticket paper is in the printer.
- Pr 505 -0
Ticket paper
Submenu

Confirm
1

Logbook is printed.
Serial number of the entry

Department number

Component number

Version number of the loaded software

Date

Time

Fig. 101: Logbook printout

7 - 162

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

7.23

Programming overview

Menus marked with an asterisk *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all
country versions.
PLU maintenance
Define PLU

Menu
Enter PLUPLU number

Sub.

Pr 110

see page
7 - 40

Unit price

7 - 41

Product group

7 - 41

Tare

7 - 41

Shelf life days

7 - 42

Barcode for article

7 - 42

Price overwriting
0= not permissible
1= permissible

7 - 43

Article type
0= weighed
1= hand
2= minus
3= By Count (Price refers to piece per package)
4= Fixed weight
5= By Count fixed weight (fixed weight and price relate to
pieces per package)

7 - 43

Weight class
0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb

7 - 44

Data of origin
0= without data of origin
1= with data of origin

7 - 44

Enter PLU article text

(PLU number 0001-9999)
Traceability text (number 9900-9999)

7 - 44

Supplementary text XX - YYYYYYYYY

XX = Supplementary text 01-04
YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200

7 - 45

Supplementary text for BLD text fields XX YYYYYYYYY

XX= Supplementary text 01-10
YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200

7 - 45

Logo printing in BLD logo fields 1-3

7 - 46

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 163

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview
PLU maintenance

Sub.

see page

Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes

00 to99

7 - 46

Unit price back-calculation

0= Without back calculation
1= with back-calculation (the unit price per piece or for
fixed weight per kg is calculated)

7 - 47

Mandatory input of pieces

0 = no mandatory input
1= with mandatory input

7 - 47

Fixed weight

00000-99999

7 - 47

Fixed weight mode

(A second representation is also printed in brackets)
0= Standard
1= lbs (g)
2= oz (lbs)
3= oz (g)
4= lbs (oz)

7 - 47

Mandatory input of fixed weight

0 = no mandatory input
1= with mandatory input

7 - 48

Assign VAT number to a PLU 1-5

7 - 48

VAT can be overwritten

0= cannot be overwritten
1= can be overwritten

7 - 48

Tare %

7 - 49

000,00 (country-dependent)

Print PLU (article) lists

Pr 115

7 - 50

Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with all article lines

7 - 50

Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with only the first article line

7 - 50

Delete single PLU (articles)

Pr 120

7 - 51

Delete PLUs (articles) from xxxxxx to yyyyyy

Pr 121

7 - 51

7 - 164

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Data maintenance

Sub.

see page

Supplement. texts enter text number 1-999999999

Pr 200

7 - 52

Pr 201

7 - 53

Define scrolling message

Enter text number 01-99

Pr 202

7 - 54

Print texts

Pr 205

7 - 55

Define supplementary text

Define header and footer texts
Enter text number 01-99
Define header and footer text

Print supplementary texts

Print header and footer texts

Print scrolling message

Delete texts

Pr 206

7 - 56

Delete single supplementary text

Delete all supplementary texts

Delete header and footer texts

Delete scrolling message text

Define barcode structure

Pr 210

7 - 57
7 - 58

Barcode format

Code constant

7 - 59

Numerical codes

7 - 59

Check and adopt code structure

7 - 61

Managing barcode structures

Pr 211

7 - 165

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview

Data maintenance

Non-PLU settings

Pr 215

Sub.

See page
7 - 64

Sell-by date for non-programmed articles

(non-PLU)

7 - 64

Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles

7 - 65

Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece

goods)

7 - 65

Barcode for non-PLU minus articles

7 - 65

Barcode for total

7 - 65

Product group for non-PLU weighed

7 - 66

Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece

goods)

Print BLD label list

Print logos

Delete BLD labels/logos

Pr 225

Delete BLD label list from - to

7 - 69

Delete BLD logos from - to

7 - 69

Create VAT
Enter VAT number 1-5

Pr 230

7 - 69

VAT set 0-99,99

7 - 70

Incl. or excl. VAT

0= Incl. VAT (gross prices)
1= Excl. VAT (net prices)

7 - 70

VAT text , 20 characters possible

Manage VAT
Print list with VAT rates

Pr 231
0

Delete VAT sets 1...5 - 1...5

Use VAT:
0= Use VAT from PLU and Non-PLU.
1-5 = Use a VAT for all articles.

7 - 166

7 - 71

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Data maintenance

Configure report layout

Pr 300

Sub.

see page
7 - 72

Printing prices
0= Prices are not printed
1= Prices are printed

7 - 72

Printing PLU without sales

0= PLUs without sales are not printed
1= PLUs without sales are printed

7 - 72

Printing customer title for PLU report

00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

7 - 72

Printing customer title for product group report

00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

Printing customer title for operator report

00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

Printing customer title for total scale sales and sales ope
rator report
00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

Printing customer title for data of origin report

00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

Printing customer title for VAT report

00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 167

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview

Data maintenance

Print reports on ticket

Pr 310

Sub.

see page
7 - 74

Scale report
0= Print or delete report
1= Print or delete report

7 - 74

PLU report with one article text line

0= Print report without deleting
1= Print or delete report

7 - 74

PLU report with all article text lines

0= Print report without deleting
1= Print or delete report

7 - 75

Product group report

7 - 76

Operator report
0= Print report without deleting
1= Print or delete report

7 - 77

Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text

line
0= Print or delete report
1= Print or delete report

7 - 77

Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text

lines
0= Print or delete reports
1= Print or delete report

7 - 78

VAT sales report

0= Print or delete report
1= Print or delete report

7 - 79

Print report on label

Pr 311

Print total sales of scale

Display / delete sales

7 - 79
01

Pr 320

7 - 79
7 - 80

Display total sales of scale

7 - 80

Delete total sales of scale

7 - 80

7 - 168

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Configuration

Setting date and time

Pr 500

Sub.

see page
7 - 81

Set date

7 - 82

Set time

7 - 82

Print year number with either 2 or 4 digits

0= Year with 2 digits
1= Year with 4 digits

7 - 82

Date representation variants

00= Day-month-year numeric
e.g 21.07.06
00= Day-month-year alphanumeric
e.g 21.07.06
02= Day-month alphanumeric
e.g 21 July
03= Month-year alphanumeric
e.g July06
04= Month Day Year American numeric
05= Month Day Year American alphanumeric
06= Year month day Hungarian numeric
06= Year month day Hungarian alphanumeric
00= Day-month-year numeric
e.g 21.07.06
09= Day month year alphanumeric
e.g. 21 July 06

7 - 83

Select paper type

0= Ticket paper
1= Label paper (only possible for label printer)

Pr 505

7 - 84

Set main operating mode

7 - 87

Settings for different operating modes

Pr 515

7 - 87

Automatic zerosetting
0= Scale is set to zero.
1=Zerosetting error 115 is displayed
2= Scale is not zeroset.

7 - 87

Open tickets / labels

0= open tickets are printed.
after scale off/on
1= open tickets are not printed out and deleted

7 - 88

Traceability marker
0= Traceability marker is off.
1= Enter traceability no. manually
2= Traceability number rigidly defined

Define traceability number

00-99 Use defined traceability number.

Negative customer total permitted/not permitted

0= The total cannot become negative during sale
1= the total cannot become negative during sale

7 - 88

Sales calculation
0= The sold items are not added to total memory
1= The sold items are added to total memory

7 - 89

Mandatory input for By Count pieces

0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 16)
1= Mandatory input for By Count piece

Mandatory input for fixed weight

0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 19)
1= Mandatory input of fixed weight

7 - 170

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Configuration

Scrolling message setting

Pr 516

Sub.

7 - 90

Select scrolling message

00= Scrolling message not active
01-99 =Scrolling message number from Pr 202

Display on
0= Customer side
1= Operator side
2= On both sides

Activation of scrolling message

0= when display is occupied or empty
1= only when display is empty

Test scrolling message

Settings for multiple-operator mode

see page

Pr 520

7 - 91

Constant key function

0= Only fix the unit price during sale
1= Only fix the tare value during sale
2= Fix unit price and tare value during sale

Print article and total label

0= Print article labels and total label
1= Only print total label
2= Only print article labels

7 - 92

Operator items display mode

000
1= Display for sheet cancellation
1= Display after registration
1= Display for total/subtotal

7 - 93

Cash register functions

0= Cash drawer does not open
1= Cash register opens with/without sale with total and
operator key
2= Cash register opens only with sale with total and ope
rator key
3= Cash register opens with/without sale with total and
operator key
4= Cash register opens only with sale with total and ope
rator key

Payment in/out
0= without payment in/out
1= Payment in/out with a currency
2= Combined payment in/out in local currency and fo
reign currency *

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 94

7 - 171

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview

Configuration

Sub.

see page

Talon printout
00= without talon
01-99= with talon the entered number corresponds to
the delay time in seconds

Pr 520

7 - 94

Repeat ticket
0= without repeat ticket
1 = with repeat ticket

Open ticket again

0= without repeat ticket
1 = with ticket reopening

Print cancellation and canceled articles

0= no printout
1= with printout

7 - 95

Printing included VAT

0= no printout
1= with printout

7 - 95

Print ticket after <Total>

0= Print ticket as requested with<Shift> +<OPx>)
1= Print ticket always

7 - 95

Setting for quick-service mode

Pr 521
0 =Article accessing via PLU-direct key, registration with
operator key.
1= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, registration is auto
matic.

7 - 172

7 - 96

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Configuration

Settings for price labeling mode *

Pr 525

Sub.

7 - 97

Labeling mode
0= Label printing with
sales price 0.00 is not
supported.
1= Weight labeling
label print with selling price 0.00 is
possible.
2= Weight labeling
label print with selling price
0.00 is
possible.

Piece price multi- label printing

00= Labels are printed one after the other
without delay.
01 - 99 = Delay time in seconds. Labels
are printed consecutively
with delay.

Configure operator keys with operator no.

TT-VVV
TT
(keys 1-16)
VW (operator 1-999)

6.111.98.5.01.13

see page

Pr 530

7 - 99

7 - 173

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview

Configuration

PLU input mode and range limitation

Pr 535

Sub.

see page
7 - 99

10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input

0 = Unit price via 10-key keypad
Switching to PLU input with switch key
1 = PLU no. input via 10-key keypad
Switching to unit price input with switch key
2 = PLU no. input only via 10-key keypad

PLU input:
Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad.
2= PLU input with 2 digits
3= PLU input with 3 digits
4= PLU input with 4 digits
5= PLU input with 5 digits
6= PLU input with 6 digits

PLU-direct key mode

0= PLU-key no. (PLU direct keyboard) corresponds to
the PLU no.
1= PLU-direct keyboard is locked
2= PLU number results from the PLU key assignment,
see sub 4

PLU direct key allocation

XXX-YYYYYY
XXX= PLU direct key 001-246
YYYYYY PLU number 001-999999

PLU range limitation

000001-999999

7 - 101

PLU call delay time

0= PLU is called with <Enter> or after entering all digits.
1-20 = The PLU is displayed after a delay time. 1= small
delay; 20= big delay

7 - 102

7 - 100

Print PLU direct keys

Pr 536

7 - 103

Tare fixed value memory 1-4

X-YYYY
X= Direct tare key 1-4
YYYY= Assigned tare

Pr 540

7 - 104

7 - 174

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Configuration

Rounding and price calculation settings for national

currency

Pr 545

Sub.

7 - 104

Rounding methods for customer total

Rounding of article total

Rounding for By Count

0= mathematical
1= round up next position

6.111.98.5.01.13

see page

7 - 105

7 - 175

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview
Configuration

Sub.

Ticket design overview

Design ticket

see page
7 - 107

Pr 550

7 - 108

Print barcode on ticket

000
1= PLU barcode on; 0= off
1= Total barcode on; 0= off
1= Talon barcode on; 0= off

Barcode height in mm on ticket

5-22 mm

7 - 108

Print tare on ticket

0= Do not print tare value on ticket
1= Tare value net weight is identified with N (country-
dependent character)
2 = Tare value on ticket net weight is not identified with N

7 - 109

Print header text

00= without header text
01-99 = Header text number

Print footer text

00= without footer text
01-99 = Footer text number

Foreign currency suppl.text

000000000= without foreign currency suppl. text
1-999999999 = Foreign currency suppl. text number

7 - 110

Rounding suppl. text

000000000= without rounding suppl. text
1-999999999 = Rounding suppl. text number

7 - 110

Font type change on ticket

000= Font from PLU
001-1 10= fixed font

Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket

0= all article text lines are printed
1-9 = the corresponding number of lines is printed
10= Text lines not printed

Ticket counter printout

0= Counter is not printed
1= Counter is printed

7 - 176

7 - 111

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Configuration

Sub.

see page

Print foreign currency 0000

Label size HHH-WW

HHH= Label height 28-105 mm
WW= Label width 10-58 mm

Change label distance

8-40 dot ( 8dot= 1mm)

Packaged-on and sell-by date on label 00

1= Packaging date on; 0= off
1= Sell-by date on; 0= off

7 - 118

Barcode on label 00
1= PLU barcode on; 0= off
1= Total barcode on; 0= off

7 - 119

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 177

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview

Configuration

Sub.

Barcode height in mm
5 - 22mm

Start of data field

Start of data field in mm 11 - 84

Data field monitoring

0= off
1 = active

7 - 122

Font change on label

0= Font from PLU
1= fixed font

7 - 123

Print price frame and texts on label:

1= Print TARE
1= Print Packaged on
1= Print Sell by
1= Print Net or Pcs
1= Print Price
1= Print price frame
1= Printout suppl. text

7 - 178

0000000

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Configuration

Sub.

see page

Operator no., Machine ID or Check Digit on label

0= without output
1= with operator no.
2= with machine ID
3= with digit code *

Pr 555

7 - 123

Print foreign currency: 0000

1= Print conversion rate
1= Print unit price, selling price and total
1= Print selling price and total
1= Only print total

7 - 124

Rotate label layout by 180oand reverse operation

11
1= Print label rotated
1= Reverse label before printing

Alternative text for packaged-on date

Pr 556

Sub.

7 - 127

Save configuration from 555

1-3 Layout memory is only possible if memory is deleted
(556 / 03)

Select label configuration

0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing
1= Configuration from memory 1
2= Configuration from memory 2
3= Configuration from memory 3

Delete label configuration

Delete memory 1-3

Foreign currency settings

Pr 560 *

7 - 128

7 - 129

Select foreign currency function

0= Euro/foreign currency off
1= Euro function on
2= Foreign currency function on

Select foreign/ second currency display

0= Foreign currency display off
(Euro or foreign currency key non-operational)
1= Foreign currency display on
Display unit and selling price, total and/or
subtotal and total in payment in/out mode

Calculation method for foreign currency

0= Total calculated through conversion
1= Total calculated through addition of
selling price

Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout

Foreign currency characters on label for price field

Decimal places in foreign currency

0-3 decimal places

Foreign currency factor

0-4 Factor 1 / 10 / 100 / 1000 /10000

7 - 180

see page

7 - 130

7 - 131

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Configuration

Sub.

Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)

e.g. 0001.01 (national unit e.g. )

Pr 560

Rounding of foreign currency

6.111.98.5.01.13

see page

7 - 131

7 - 181

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview

Database configuration

TCP-IP settings

Pr 600

Sub.

7 - 132

DHCP
0= No DHCP, use fixed IP addresses
1= Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server.

Display of current IP address

IP: IP address if no DHCP selected

Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected

Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected

DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP

selected

DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP

selected

Enter host name 32 ASCII characters are possible.

Leasing address from DHCP

Display current IP address

Pr 601

Printout of communication settings

Pr 602

Set scale no
01 - 32

Pr 603

Set department no
001-999

Pr 604

Set machine ID
0001 - 9999

Pr 605

7 - 182

see page

7 - 133

7 - 134

7 - 135

7 - 136

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Database configuration

Database configuration (memory management).

Pr 606

Sub.

see page
7 - 136

Number of PLU
100 - 6000

7 - 137

Number of supplementary texts per PLU

0-4

Decimal places
0-3 = Number of decimal places
4= Standard value (country-dependent)

7 - 138

Start Database configuration

7 - 139

Number of items (ticket memory)

00 - 10

50- 1200

Set scale for system

(from program version 2.00)

Pr 607

7 - 140

Scale type 0= Standalone; 1= Slave; 9=Master

7 - 140

Multicast IP address

7 - 141

Multicast IP port number

7 - 141

UDP port number

7 - 141

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 183

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview

Database configuration

Sub.

Control display lighting

00= automatic display illumination off
1-99 = automatic display illumination on

Pr 610

7 - 142

Scales switch-off time

1-99 in minutes

Pr 615

7 - 143

WLAN settings
The settings 02-07 only possible,
if WLAN module is switched off (Pr 621/01

Pr 621

Module on/off
0 = WLAN off
1= WLAN on

Time slices for WLAN on/off in a defined period of time

X-YYYYYYYY
X= 1-3 time slices
YYYYYYYY= Time on/off

Ping interval
0000= Ping off
0001-9999 = Interval between 2 pings in sec.
Start of ping interval, when WLAN on (Pr 621/01)

IP address for WLAN

000000000000

Test telegram to host

0= Send off
0001-9999 = Interval between 2 pings in sec.

IP address of telegram recipient

000000000000

Port number of telegram recipient

0001-65536 (standard= 49152)

Switch on/off beeper 000

1= Normal beeper on; 0= off
1= Acceptance beeper on; 0= off
1= Acceptance beeper on; 0= off

7 - 184

see page

Pr 622

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Database configuration

Sub.

Scale (display) sensitivity 0-5

0= Display sensitive
..
5= Display less sensitive against vibrations

Pr 625

7 - 147

Reconfigure keyboard

Pr 630

7 - 148

Keyboard selection
00= 84-keyboard standard
01= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame
02 = 84-keyboard with 30
front foil
03= 84-keyboard, reprogrammed

Pr 631

7 - 149

Clearing RAM
81 RAM is cleared

Pr 666

Input password for menu

1XXXXX 6-digit numeric password
000000 Password is deactivated

Pr 690

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings

Pr 695

7
7 - 150

7 - 151

Change main currency to second currency

0= Main currency in old local currency
1= Main currency in new local currency

Convert PLU price into Euro

6.111.98.5.01.13

see page

7 - 185

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview

Service

Sub.

see page

Test printing

Pr 700

7 - 152

Print boot log information

Pr 701

7 - 152

Print fonts

Pr 702

7 - 153

Print menu settings

Pr 703

7 - 153

Print weighing system information

Pr 704

7 - 154

Printer settings

Pr 710

7 - 155

Infeed for labels

00 - 11
= minus feed
12
Standard settings
13-24
plus infeed

Move print format on the label

00 - 11
= minus feed
12
Standard settings
13-24
plus infeed

7 - 155

Correct ticket feed

00-19
minus feed
20
Standard settings
21-40
plus infeed

7 - 156

Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket

00-99 (the higher the number, the less sensitive is detec
tion)
00= Paper end detection off
40= Standard settings

Change printing intensity

0= no reduction
1= Reduce the printing intensity by 10%
2= Reduce the printing intensity by 20%
3= Reduce the printing intensity by 30%

Display ADC program version

Pr 712

Detailed display

Pr 714

Display ADC type

Pr 715

7 - 186

7 - 157
7 - 157

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Programming
Programming overview

Service

Display program version

Pr 716

Sub.

7 - 158

Main program

Version number

Boot loader

Version number

Option resource

Version number

Layout resource

Version number

Menu resource

Version number

Text resource

Version number

Keyboard resource Version number

Font resource

Version number

SAP number

see page

Display battery voltage

Pr 717

7 - 159

Display test

Pr 718

7 - 160

Logbook monitoring

Pr 730

7 - 160

Display logbook

7 - 161

Print out logbook

7 - 162

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 187

Programming

Operating instruction BC II

Programming overview

7 - 188

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Troubleshooting

You can generally eliminate the errors specified below yourself, using the described
remedy.
In the case of errors which you cannot eliminate yourself and which are not described in
this Operating Manual, please call your Bizerba customer service point.
Please provide your Bizerba customer service point with the following details:
-

Device type (see type plate)

Device no. (see type plate)

Error description

This will facilitate preparations by customer service staff.

8.1

Fault description
Fault

Display does not illumi

nate.

Cause
No supply voltage.

Rectification
Check and insert power cable.
Check connection plug
Check connection cable
Press On-Off key

Weight value display not Load plate not correctly posi

at zero or modified.
tioned or objects located on
the load plate.

Clean load plate, position cor

rectly and remove objects.

Soiling on or beneath the load

plate.
Level scale.
Scale not leveled.

Switch scale off/on.

Printer will not print.

Open print head.

Connect print head correctly

(see page 5 - 10).

Printer jammed.

Drive motor for paper trans

port overloaded or jammed.

Check paper track and re

move any detached labels.
Clean printer (paper guide).

Poor receipt or label

printing.

6.111.98.5.01.13

Unsuitable receipt or label pa Clean thermal strip.

per.

8-1

Troubleshooting

8.2

Operating instruction BC II

Messages

Operating errors or faults in the electronics are indicated by Cod and an error code digit.
Display

Cod 1 1 2
kg T

Price / kg

Price

Cause

Messages

Rectification

Cod 112

0= Receipt paper
1=Label paper

---

Press <C> key or switch the

scale off and on again with the
<On-Of f> key.

Other error code digits

8-2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Maintenance

9.1

Cleaning

The cleaning instructions must be observed during installation, operation and

maintenance.

9.1.1

Cleaning device

_______________________________________________________________________
DANGER

Water getting into device!

Danger of death from electric shock.
-

Make sure that no water runs into the device when cleaning.

Do not wash device off or spray-wash.

_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION

Incorrect cleaning agents!

Damage of device surfaces.
-

Do not use spirit, acetone or aggressive cleaning or scouring agents.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
Switch off device before cleaning and pull out power plug.
_______________________________________________________________________
Use warm water with dish-washing detergent (food safe) for cleaning. Use a soft,
non-fraying cloth, moistened lightly.

6.111.98.5.01.13

9-1

Maintenance

9.1.2

Operating instruction BC II

Cleaning the printer

Clean thermal bar

Ticket printer, label printer or Linerless printer.
The thermal printhead must be cleaned on a regular basis and as soon as you notice that
the printing quality has decreased.
_______________________________________________________________________
ATTENTION

Coated thermal bar!

The thermal bar is coated with a glass passivation layer and must not
be touched or cleaned with hard objects.
Use Bizerba cleaning products to clean the thermal bar.

_______________________________________________________________________

Open the side cover of the scale.

Open the printer cover by pulling it
upwards.
Open the printhead.
Clean the thermal bar 1 with the Bizerba
thermal printhead cleaning pen or dip a
cleaning pad in Bizerba cleaning solvent..
Afterwards, dry off with a dry cleaning
bud.

Fig. 102: Thermal bar

9-2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Maintenance

Clean label printer

Inspect label printer weekly for glue residue deposits on deflection pin, take-up arbor and
paper deflector and clean.
Clean the deflection pin and take-up pin.

Open the printer cover and printhead.

Remove the label roll.
Remove glue from parts

9
Fig. 103: Deflection pin, take-up pin
Clean paper deflector
Pull the paper deflector

out sideways.

Clean the paper deflector with the LR

label remover, from Bizerba.
The LR-label remover may not be
used to clean thermal bars.
2

Fig. 104: Paper deflector

Push the paper deflector

6.111.98.5.01.13

in sideways.

9-3

Maintenance

9.1.3

Operating instruction BC II

Cleaning products for printer

Ordering information
The cleaning products can be obtained from Bizerba Service or Bizerba technical
consultants.
Cleaner for thermal bar
Cleaning pen 12ml
Order no.: 5077 7050000

9
Aerosol can, 200ml
Order no.: 9400 8900133

Thermal bar cleaning set

consisting of:
5 cleaning buds made of wood with leather
coating
1 pcs. IPA cleaning solvent 12 ml
Order no.: 9400 8919 000

Moisten the tip of the cleaning bud with a

few drops of the cleaning solvent.
Clean the thermal bar immediately with
cleaning bud.

9-4

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Maintenance

Cleaner for residues of glue from labels

_______________________________________________________________________
ATTENTION

Thermal bar coating and rubber rollers!

Damage to the coating
-

Do not use label remover for cleaning thermal bar and

rubber-covered roll!

_______________________________________________________________________
Label remover
Aerosol can, 200ml
Order no.: 9594 3000000

6.111.98.5.01.13

9-5

Maintenance

9.2

Operating instruction BC II

Maintenance

The load plate must be removed every 4 weeks and loose dirt removed with a brush or
vacuum cleaner.
Replace the load plate and check the zero point of the scale. Switch the scale off and on if
necessary.

9.2.1

Testing the weight display

Place reference weight of 2x3 kg on the scale and read off the display at 3 and 6kg.
This test must be repeated at regular intervals.

9.2.2

Note on storing thermal paper

Store unprinted thermal paper without direct light exposure to light (original packaging) in
closed box or similar, if possible. It keeps its printability for up to 5 years if stored at max.
60 oC and at a max. of 65% relative air humidity.
Printed thermal paper is readable for up to 10 years if not exposed to direct sunlight and if
kept at temperatures up to a maximum of 30 o C and at a maximum of 65% relative air
humidity.

9.2.3

Ticket, label and Linerless rollers

To avoid faults in the device, only ticket and label rolls may be used that have been
checked and approved by Bizerba.These ticket and label rollers are identified with a
corresponding number.
We are not liable for damage/faults that are produced from using ticket and label rolls that
have not been checked and approved by Bizerba.
Therefore, please order ticket, labels and Linerless rolls only at a Bizerba sales agent near
you:
Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG
Papier und Etiketten
Harpener Hellweg 31
44805 Bochum 1
Germany
Phone: +49 234 / 9557-0
FAX: +49 234 / 5070247

9-6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Technical data

10.1

Dimensions

Technical data

Scale BC II 800
L

Length:

W Width:
H Overall height:
H1 Complete height:

342 mm
462 mm
90 mm

512 mm
H
W

Fig. 105: BC II 800

Scale BC II 100

Length:

360 mm

W Width:

432 mm

H Overall height:

174 mm

W
L

Fig. 106: BC II 100

Scale BC II 200
L

Length:

360 mm

W Width:

487 mm

H Overall height:

174 mm

H1 Complete height:

461 mm

H
W
L

Fig. 107: BC II 200

6.111.98.5.01.13

10 - 1

Technical data

10.2

Operating instruction BC II

Power supply

The electrical power supply must comply with the national requirements and tolerances.
Technical data for the mains power supply
Mains supply
Single-phase A.C. voltage, see data on type plate.
Permissible mains voltage tolerance (steady-state) normal:
+6% to -10% of nominal value
Supply frequency:
50/60 Hz

Permissible tolerance of mains frequency:

+2% to -2%
Permissible nonlinear distortion factor of supply voltage
x 5%
Protective conductor leakage current max.:
3.5 mA

10.3

Environmental conditions

The following conditions must always be observed when using electronic retail scales,
POS terminals, weighing and EDP systems, recording equipment and similar devices,
equipment combinations and spare parts.
For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective
manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.

Threshold values
Device family

Protection
type in
accordanc
e with
IP

EDP systems:

+15
(+60)

+30
(+87)

-10
(+14)

+43
(+109)

Retail scales

-10
(+14)

+40
(+104)

-20
(-4)

+60
(+140)

External devices
1

Temperature
Relative humidity%
oC Celsius
(degF Fahrenheit)
Operation
Storage
Operation Storage
min.
max.
min.
max. min. max. min.max. 1
8

80
90

The threshold values of the respective manufacturer apply.

Bedewing of equipment is not permitted

10 - 2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Subject index
A
Addition of customer total, 7 - 85
Article
Allocate supplementary text, 7 - 45
Assign barcode, 7 - 42
Assign product group, 7 - 41
Clear, 7 - 51
Data of origin, 7 - 44
Define, 7 - 40
Define article tare, 7 - 41
Define unit price, 7 - 41
Enter sell-by date, 7 - 42
Overwrite unit price, 7 - 43
Print list, 7 - 50
Report, 7 - 75
Text, 7 - 44
Type, 7 - 43
Weight class, 7 - 44
Assign VAT, to PLU, 7 - 35, 7 - 48
Assisted sale with labels, 6 - 29
Assisted sales with ticket, 6 - 24
Automatic zerosetting, 7 - 87

B
Back-calculation, 7 - 47
Barcode, 7 - 15
Assign Code 128, 7 - 28
Barcode structure example for Code
128, 7 - 26
Barcode structure example, EAN 13, 7
- 20
Check and adopt code structure, 7 - 61
Code 128, 7 - 23
Code structure for all PLUs, 7 - 63
Create barcode structure, 7 - 58
Define structure, 7 - 58
Delete code structure, 7 - 62
EAN 13 structure example, 7 - 22
for article, 7 - 42
for non-PLU, 7 - 65
for PLU, 7 - 42
for total, 7 - 65
Height on label, 7 - 119
Height on ticket, 7 - 108
Instore code, Examples, 7 - 22
6.111.98.5.01.13

Subject index

Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 18, 7 - 21

manage, 7 - 62
Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 17
Overview, 7 - 15
Print barcode structure, 7 - 62
Print code structures, 7 - 6, 7 - 62
print on label, 7 - 119
print on ticket, 7 - 108
Beeper, on/off, 7 - 146
BLD
BLD label list, 7 - 6, 7 - 68
BLD logo fields, 7 - 46
Delete BLD labels, 7 - 69
Delete BLD logos, 7 - 69
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU, 7 137
Number of BLD text fields per PLU, 7 137
Supplementary text for BLD text fields,
7 - 45
BLD
Label example, 7 - 115
Select BLD labels, 7 - 118
BLD (Bizerba Label Designer), 7 - 6, 7
- 45
By Count fixed weight, 7 - 47
Create, 7 - 33
Mandatory input of pieces, 6 - 42
Overview, 7 - 33
By-Count
Back-calculation, 7 - 47
Compulsory entry, 7 - 89
Create, 7 - 31
Database configuration, 7 - 30
Fixed weight mode, 7 - 47
Mandatory entry, 7 - 47
Overview, 7 - 30
Piece goods, 7 - 30

C
Cancellation, 6 - 11
Cash register
Cash register drawer, 6 - 44
Connect cash drawer, 4 - 4
Till function, 7 - 93
11 - 1

Subject index
Change line, 7 - 10
Check digit, print on label, 7 - 123
Clean label printer, 9 - 3
Cleaning, 9 - 1
Cleaning printer, 9 - 2
Cleaning products, 9 - 4
Clear
Header and footer texts, 7 - 56
RAM, 7 - 150
Supplementary texts, 7 - 56
Tare , 6 - 21

Operating instruction BC II
Number of supplementary texts, 7 137
Set DHCP, 7 - 133
Set number of PLUs, 7 - 137
Set TCP-IP, 7 - 132
start, 7 - 139
Date , Representation, 7 - 83
Date/Time
set, 7 - 81
Setting, 7 - 82
Decimal places, 7 - 138

Clear memory, 7 - 150

Define supplementary texts, erstellen,

7 - 52

Clearing RAM, 7 - 150

Deleting, Supplementary texts, 7 - 56

Code 128, 7 - 23
Assign Code 128, 7 - 28
Operating procedure for structure
creation, 7 - 25
Structure example, 7 - 24, 7 - 26

Department number, 7 - 135

Commissioning, 4 - 8

Direct keys, 7 - 100

Conditions for the place of

installation, 4 - 1

Display, 5 - 2
control lighting, 7 - 142
Icons, 5 - 2

Constant, 6 - 13, 7 - 91
Continuous operation, 7 - 36
Multicast IP address, 7 - 141
Multicast port number, 7 - 141
Overview, 7 - 36
Scale type, 7 - 140
UDP port number, 7 - 141
Customer total
Addition, 7 - 87
Addition , 7 - 85
negative, 7 - 88
Rounding, 7 - 105

D
Data field monitoring, 7 - 122
Data of origin, 7 - 44
automatic traceability no., 7 - 29
Manual input, 7 - 29
sales report, 7 - 77
Database configuration, 7 - 132
Memory management, 7 - 136
Number of items (ticket memory), 7 138
11 - 2

Designation label, 2 - 2
Device Configuration, 7 - 81
Device types, 2 - 1

Display ADC program version, 7 - 157

Display battery voltage, 7 - 159
Display program version, 7 - 158
Display test, 7 - 160
Display the load cell type, 7 - 157

E
EAN 13, 7 - 18
Allocate EAN 13, 7 - 21
Example of structure definition, 7 - 20
Structure example, 7 - 19
End of label, 5 - 12
Environmental conditions, 10 - 2
Explanation of symbols, 1 - 2

F
Fixed weight
Back-calculation, 7 - 47
Create, 7 - 32
6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II
Overview, 7 - 32
Fixed weight , Database
configuration, 7 - 30

Subject index
Input
Special characters, 7 - 11
Text, 7 - 9, 7 - 10

Font
Change on label, 7 - 123
change on ticket, 7 - 111

Insert receipt paper, 5 - 11

Font type, change, 7 - 9

Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 18

Footer text
Clear, 7 - 56
Define, 7 - 53
print on ticket, 7 - 109
Printing list, 7 - 55

IP address, Display, 7 - 133, 7 - 135

Foreign currency
Calculation method, 7 - 130
Currency exchange rate, 7 - 131
Currency factor, 7 - 131
Currency symbol, 7 - 130
Decimal places, 7 - 130
print on label, 7 - 124
Print suppl. text on ticket, 7 - 110
Rounding, 7 - 131
Second currency display, 7 - 129
Select function, 7 - 129
Settings, 7 - 129

G
General operating mode settings, 7 87
Guidelines, 2 - 4

H
Header and footer text list, 7 - 4
Header text
Clear, 7 - 56
Define, 7 - 53
Deleting, 7 - 56
print on label, 7 - 120
print on ticket, 7 - 109
Printing list, 7 - 55

I
Initial display, 7 - 1
Initial setting, 7 - 3

6.111.98.5.01.13

Install label roll, 5 - 12

Installation, 4 - 1

K
Key functions, 5 - 4
Keyboard, 5 - 3, 5 - 4
Functions, 5 - 4
Keyboard, 5 - 4
Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3
Keyboard selection, 7 - 149

Keys
Function code table, 7 - 149
Modify function, 7 - 148
Konformittserklrung, 3, 5

L
Label
Barcode printout, 7 - 119
Change font, 7 - 123
Data field monitoring, 7 - 122
Delete configuration, 7 - 128
Label distance, 7 - 118
Label height, 7 - 118
Print article label, 7 - 92
Print total label, 7 - 92
Printing speed, 7 - 126
Release print of:
Alternative text for sell-by date, 7 120
Barcode, 7 - 119
Check digit, 7 - 123
Foreign currency, 7 - 124
Header text, 7 - 120
Logo, 7 - 120
Machine ID, 7 - 123
Operator No., 7 - 123
Packaged-on and sell-by date, 7 118

11 - 3

Subject index
Price range and texts, 7 - 123
Tare, 7 - 119
Save configuration, 7 - 127
Select configuration, 7 - 128
Set barcode height, 7 - 119
Set date field start, 7 - 121
Set feed, 7 - 155
Set text field start, 7 - 121

Operating instruction BC II

M
Machine ID, print on label, 7 - 123
Main operating mode, 7 - 3, 7 - 84
select, 7 - 85
Mains supply, 3 - 2, 4 - 3
Maintenance, 9 - 1, 9 - 6

Label design, Overview, 7 - 114

Manual input, 6 - 9

Label printer, 5 - 12

Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 17

Label type , 7 - 117

Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3

Labeling mode, 7 - 97

Memory management, 7 - 136

Labels
Delete BLD labels, 7 - 69
Device Configuration, 7 - 116
Move print format, 7 - 155
Multi- printing, 6 - 7, 6 - 8
Multiple printing, 7 - 98
Price labeling mode, 6 - 6
Price labeling mode , 6 - 5
Print BLD label list, 7 - 68
Quick-service mode, 6 - 4
rotated layout, 7 - 124
Self-service mode, 6 - 3

Menu call-up, 7 - 2

Leveling of scale, 4 - 2
Lists
Barcode structures, 7 - 6, 7 - 62
BLD label list, 7 - 6
Communication settings, 7 - 135
Delete header and footer text list, 7 56
Delete supplementary text list, 7 - 56
Header and footer text list, 7 - 4, 7 55
Logo list, 7 - 7
Menu settings, 7 - 153
PLU (articles), 7 - 4
PLU article list, 7 - 50
PLU direct keys, 7 - 5, 7 - 103
Supplementary text list, 7 - 5, 7 - 55
Weighing system information, 7 - 154
Logbook monitoring, 7 - 160
Logo
BLD, 7 - 46
Delete, 7 - 68
Print list, 7 - 68

11 - 4

Menu password, 7 - 1, 7 - 150

Minus amount, 6 - 10
Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2, 7 - 91
Multiplication
Minus amount, 6 - 10
PLU price per piece, 6 - 16
Price per piece manual input, 6 - 9

N
Negative customer total, 7 - 88
Network
Display IP address, 7 - 135
Settings, 7 - 132
Non-PLU, Settings, 7 - 64
Numeric code , 7 - 59

O
Operating conditions, 2 - 5
Operating options
Labels multi-printing/fixed weight, 6 - 8
Multi- printing of labels, 6 - 7
Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2
Overview, 6 - 2
Price labeling mode, 6 - 5, 6 - 6
Quick-service mode, 6 - 4
Self-service mode, 6 - 3
Operational safety, 3 - 2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II
Operator, Report, 7 - 77
Operator items display , 7 - 93
Operator report, 7 - 77

Subject index
Print list, 7 - 50
registration, 6 - 16
Report, 7 - 75
Round article total, 7 - 105
Set number, 7 - 137
Tare , 6 - 21
Weight class, 7 - 44

Operator tare, 6 - 22
call up value saved, 6 - 23
save value entered, 6 - 22
save weighed value, 6 - 22

PLU , Define unit price, 7 - 41

Overview of list, 7 - 4

PLU list, 7 - 4

Overwrite unit price, 6 - 16

PLU maintenance, 7 - 39
Define PLU, 7 - 40

Power supply, 10 - 2

Packaged-on date
Alternative text, 7 - 126
print on label, 7 - 118

Price calculation, 7 - 104

Paper
Label printer, 5 - 13
Receipt printer, 5 - 11

Price overwrite, 6 - 16

Paper end detection, 7 - 156

Paper type, 7 - 84
Password, 7 - 1, 7 - 150
Payment in/out, 6 - 44, 7 - 94
Release printout on ticket, 7 - 112

Price labeling mode, 6 - 5, 6 - 6, 7 97

Price overwriting, 7 - 43
Price per piece manual input, 6 - 9
Print boot log information, 7 - 152
Print communication settings, 7 - 135
Print direct keys list, 7 - 5
Print fonts, 7 - 153

Place of installation, 4 - 1

Print logbook, 7 - 162

PLU, 5 - 5
-Overwrite unit price, 6 - 16
Allocate supplementary text, 7 - 45
Article text, 7 - 44
Assign barcode, 7 - 42
Assign product group, 7 - 41
call, 6 - 14
Clear, 7 - 51
Define, 7 - 40
Define PLU tare, 7 - 41
Direct key allocation, 7 - 100
Enter sell-by date, 7 - 42
Input with 10-key keypad, 6 - 15
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU, 7 137
Number of BLD text fields per PLU, 7 137
Number of supplementary texts per
PLU, 7 - 137
Overwrite unit price, 7 - 43
Print article label, 7 - 92
Print direct keys list, 7 - 5

Print menu settings, 7 - 153

Weighing system information, 7 - 154

6.111.98.5.01.13

Print PLU
Direct key mode, 7 - 100
Enter number of digits, 7 - 100
input mode, 7 - 99
Number of digits for input, 7 - 100
Print direct keys, 7 - 103
Range limit, 7 - 101
Print PLU , Device Configuration, 7 100
Print supplement. text list, 7 - 5
Print weighing system information, 7
- 154
Printer, 5 - 8
Label printer, 5 - 12
Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800 ,
5-9
Printer lid BC II 100/200 , 5 - 8
Receipt printer, 5 - 11

11 - 5

Subject index
Side cover BC II 100/ 200, 5 - 8
test, 7 - 152
Thermal print head, 5 - 10
Printer settings, 7 - 155
Change printing intensity , 7 - 156
Printing head, open/close, 5 - 10
Printing speed, 7 - 126
Product group, for non-PLU, 7 - 66
Product group report, 7 - 76
Product groups, for PLU, 7 - 41
Product with data of origin, 6 - 45
Programming overview, 7 - 163

Q
Quick- service mode, 7 - 96

Quick-service mode, 6 - 4

R
Range limit, 7 - 101
Receipt printer, 5 - 11
Receipt printer paper end, 5 - 11
Rechargeable battery, 4 - 6
Icons, 4 - 7
Reports, 7 - 72
Customer title for reports, 7 - 73
on label, 7 - 79
on ticket, 7 - 74
Operator, 7 - 77
PLU articles, 7 - 75
PLU products, 7 - 75
Product groups, 7 - 76
Scales, 7 - 74
Traceability data sales, 7 - 77, 7 - 78
VAT report, 7 - 79

Operating instruction BC II

S
Safety instructions, 3 - 1
Sales
Clear, 7 - 80
Display, 7 - 80
Print on label, 7 - 79
Sales calculation, 7 - 89
Sales calculation, Release addition, 7
- 89
Scale
Payment in/out, 6 - 44
Sensitivity, 7 - 147
Turn-of f time, 7 - 143
with cash drawer, 6 - 44
Scale number, 7 - 135
Scale report, 7 - 74
Scale switch-off time, 7 - 143
Scales network, Continuous
operation, 7 - 36
Scroll function, 6 - 12
Scrolling messages
activate, 7 - 90
activating, 7 - 14, 7 - 90
Define text, 7 - 14, 7 - 54
Delete text, 7 - 57
print, 7 - 5
select, 7 - 90
Select display location, 7 - 90
Settings, 7 - 90
test, 7 - 91
Second currency, 7 - 151
Change main currency, 7 - 151
Convert PLU price, 7 - 151
Select layout
Label layout, 7 - 85, 7 - 86
Receipt layout, 7 - 85
Ticket layout, 7 - 86

Reverification, 2 - 3

Self-service mode, 6 - 3

Rounding, 7 - 104
By-Count, 7 - 106
Foreign currency, 7 - 131
Supplementary text, 7 - 110

Sell-by date
Alternative text on label, 7 - 120
Print on label, 7 - 118

11 - 6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II
Print texts, 7 - 123

Subject index
Printing, 7 - 55

Sensitivity, of the scale, 7 - 147

Supply voltage , 3 - 2, 4 - 3

Service menu, 7 - 152

Switch off, 6 - 1

Set width of paper , 5 - 13

Switch on, 6 - 1

Setting IP address, einstellen, 7 - 133

Switching operation mode, 7 - 3, 7 86

select, 7 - 86

Setting machine ID, einstellen, 7 - 136

Settings
Date, 7 - 82
Date representation, 7 - 83
Department number, 7 - 135
different operating modes, 7 - 85
Display lighting, 7 - 142
DNS1, DNS2, 7 - 134
Euro, 7 - 151
for different operating modes, 7 - 87
Foreign currency, 7 - 129
Gateway, 7 - 133
Host name, 7 - 134
IP address, 7 - 133
Machine ID, 7 - 136
Main operating mode, 7 - 84
Multiple-operator mode, 7 - 91
Network, 7 - 132
Non-PLU, 7 - 64
Price calculation, 7 - 104
Price labeling mode, 7 - 97
Print menu settings, 7 - 153
Printer, 7 - 155
Quick service mode, 7 - 96
Quick-service mode, 7 - 96
Scale number, 7 - 135
Scrolling messages, 7 - 90
Sensitivity, 7 - 147
Subnet mask, 7 - 133
Switching operating mode, 7 - 86
TCP-IP , 7 - 132
Time, 7 - 82
Year with 2, 4 digits, 7 - 82

System
Continuous operation, 7 - 36
Identification on system, 7 - 37
Installation, 4 - 5
Multicast IP address, 7 - 141
Multicast port number, 7 - 141
Scale type, 7 - 140
System conditions, 7 - 37
System set-up, 7 - 37
Take device out of the system, 7 - 38
UDP port number, 7 - 141

T
Talon, 6 - 25, 7 - 94
Tare
Fixed value memory, 7 - 104
print on label, 7 - 119
print on ticket, 7 - 109
Tare
Batch tare, 6 - 19
clear, 6 - 21
Manual tare, 6 - 20
Operator tare, 6 - 22, 6 - 23
PLU tare, 7 - 41
Tare %, 7 - 49
unknown tare, 6 - 18
Tare functions, 6 - 18
PLU tare, 6 - 21
Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4, 6 - 21

Side cover , 5 - 8

Test printing, 7 - 152

Special characters, 7 - 11

Text
Alternative text for packaged-on date,
7 - 126
Alternative text for use-by date, 7 126
Define header and footer text, 7 - 53
Deleting, 7 - 56
Enter PLU text, 7 - 44
Function keys, 7 - 13

Standards, 2 - 4
Subtotal, 6 - 13
Supplementary text
for BLD text fields, 7 - 45
for PLU, 7 - 45
Supplementary texts
Clear, 7 - 56
6.111.98.5.01.13

11 - 7

Subject index
Input, 7 - 9
print
Header and footer text, 7 - 4, 7 - 55
Supplementary texts, 7 - 5
Printing out overview, 7 - 55
Scrolling messages, 7 - 54
Suppl. article text, 7 - 45
Supplementary text, 7 - 52
Thermal bar, Cleaning, 9 - 2
Thermal paper storage, 9 - 6
Thermal strip, close, 5 - 10

Ticket
Assisted sales, 6 - 24
Change font, 7 - 111
Correct feed, 7 - 156
Device Configuration, 7 - 108
Number of article text lines, 7 - 111
Open ticket again, 6 - 26, 6 - 27, 7 94
Open tickets, 7 - 88
Print cancellation, 7 - 95
Print foreign currency, 7 - 112
print upon request, 6 - 25
Printing if requested, 7 - 95
Printing VAT included, 7 - 95
Release print of:
Amount paid in/out, 7 - 112
Barcode, 7 - 108
footer text, 7 - 109
Foreign currency suppl. text, 7 - 110
Header text, 7 - 109
Rounding suppl. text, 7 - 110
Supplementary product text, 7 - 112
Tare, 7 - 109
Repeat ticket, 6 - 26
Set barcode height, 7 - 108
Ticket counter, 7 - 111
Ticket repetition, 7 - 94
Ticket design, Overview, 7 - 107
Time, Setting, 7 - 82
Total, 6 - 13
Rounding of article total, 7 - 105
Rounding of customer total, 7 - 105
Total , Total label, 7 - 85
Total sales report, 7 - 79
Clear, 7 - 80
Display, 7 - 80

11 - 8

Operating instruction BC II
Traceability data, 6 - 45
Traceability marker, 7 - 29, 7 - 88
Define traceability number, 7 - 88
Manual input, 7 - 29
PLU data of origin, 7 - 44

U
Unit price, programming, 7 - 41
Unit price input, 6 - 9
via 10-key keypad, 6 - 9
Use-by date, 7 - 42
Alternative text, 7 - 126
for non-PLU, 7 - 64

V
VAT
can be overwritten, 7 - 48
Define for all articles, 7 - 71
Define tax rate, 7 - 70
for non-PLU, 7 - 67
for non-PLU minus, 7 - 67
for non-PLU weighed, 7 - 67
incl. or exclusive, 7 - 70
List, 7 - 8
Maintain, 7 - 69
manage, 7 - 71
Overview, 7 - 34
Printing list, 7 - 71
Text , 7 - 70
Vendors
Keys, 7 - 99
Number, 7 - 123
Verbund, Installation, 4 - 5
Verification information, 2 - 3

W
Waagenverbund, Installation, 4 - 5
Weight class, 7 - 44
Weight input, Manual, 6 - 17
WLAN
Functional diagnosis, 7 - 146
on/off, 7 - 143

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II
Settings, 7 - 144, 7 - 145
Switch on, 7 - 144

Subject index

Z
Zerosetting, 6 - 1, 7 - 87

Y
Year , 2 or 4-digit, 7 - 82

6.111.98.5.01.13

11 - 9

Subject index

Operating instruction BC II

11 - 10

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

Appendix
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN
eurofins Certificate modas BWLC-V2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Appendix

Operating instruction BC II

6.111.98.5.01.13

Hauptverwaltung Balingen
Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen
Wilhelm-Kraut-Strae 65
72336 Balingen, Germany

Declaration of type conformity

We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described
below
Definition:
retail scale
Type:

BC II . . . (BC II 100, 200, 800)

No. of EC type approval certificate:

D07-09-014

No. of notified body for EC type approval

certificate:

0102 (PTB)

complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current
requirements of the following EC directives:
Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments

2009/23/EG (90/384/EWG)

EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility

2004/108/EC

Directive on electrical equipment designed for use

within certain voltage limits

2006/95/EC

Applied national technical standards and specifications:

Metrology:

DIN EN 45501 (OIML R76-Ed. 2006)

EMC:

DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 61000-6-3/2007-09

DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06

Safety:

DIN EN 60950-1/

This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic

weighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of type
conformity of a notified body.
This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba.
The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerba
order documents). Any modification made to the above device type without the
prior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid.

Date: June

27th, 2011

Signature of manufacturer:

ppa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Title:

Matthias Harsch
Chief Executive Officer-Sales (CEO-S)
Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG

6.111.98.5.01.13

Hauptverwaltung Balingen
Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen
Wilhelm-Kraut-Strae 65
72336 Balingen, Germany

Declaration of type conformity

We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described
below
Definition:
retail scale
Type:

BC II . . . with WLAN
(BC II 100, 200, 800)

No. of EC type approval certificate:

D07-09-014

No. of notified body for EC type approval

certificate:

0102 (PTB)

complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current
requirements of the following EC directives:
Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments

2009/23/EG

EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility

2004/108/EC

Directive on electrical equipment designed for use

within certain voltage limits

2006/95/EC

Applied national technical standards and specifications:

Metrology:

DIN EN 45501 (OIML R76-Ed. 2006)

EMC:

DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 61000-6-3/2007-09

DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06

Safety:

DIN EN 60950-1

WLAN:

See data in declaration of conformity of manufacturer.

This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic

Date:

June 27th, 2011

Signature of manufacturer:

ppa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Title:

Bizerba Bc-Ii-100 800 Manual PDF
0% (1)
Bizerba Bc-Ii-100 800 Manual PDF
326 pages
Manual Bizerba CWE
No ratings yet
Manual Bizerba CWE
141 pages
Ind 310
100% (2)
Ind 310
166 pages
Manual Dibal PDF
No ratings yet
Manual Dibal PDF
74 pages
User Manual D165V - B English Rev 2 - 3
No ratings yet
User Manual D165V - B English Rev 2 - 3
79 pages
DLN Service Manual
67% (3)
DLN Service Manual
22 pages
TH TouchWin Manual
100% (1)
TH TouchWin Manual
70 pages
BEL 252 - 252X - XL V 'N' Operation and Service Manual - FEB 2018, 65-45-7 PDF
100% (1)
BEL 252 - 252X - XL V 'N' Operation and Service Manual - FEB 2018, 65-45-7 PDF
46 pages
XK3101-K 中性英文使用说明书
No ratings yet
XK3101-K 中性英文使用说明书
22 pages
Digi sm110 Label Printing Scale User Manual
No ratings yet
Digi sm110 Label Printing Scale User Manual
147 pages
61269800199R1-Data Description BS
100% (1)
61269800199R1-Data Description BS
349 pages
FT-11 FT-11D Technical Manual v.1.35 GB
100% (1)
FT-11 FT-11D Technical Manual v.1.35 GB
52 pages
Manuale Di Istruzioni Instruction Manual: Laboratory Ovens
No ratings yet
Manuale Di Istruzioni Instruction Manual: Laboratory Ovens
60 pages
Leeson Speedmaster Manual
100% (1)
Leeson Speedmaster Manual
80 pages
ML Series Operating Manual
No ratings yet
ML Series Operating Manual
27 pages
XK3190 D10 Operation - Toc 1
33% (3)
XK3190 D10 Operation - Toc 1
3 pages
KINGSHIP Calibration Manual - SSW Series (Ver. 5.9) PDF
100% (3)
KINGSHIP Calibration Manual - SSW Series (Ver. 5.9) PDF
2 pages
Model BT
No ratings yet
Model BT
24 pages
Choose The BEST Answer.: Practice Test 2 - Assessment of Learning Multiple Choice
100% (1)
Choose The BEST Answer.: Practice Test 2 - Assessment of Learning Multiple Choice
6 pages
XK 3190-A 1
100% (1)
XK 3190-A 1
21 pages
Bizerba bc2 800
No ratings yet
Bizerba bc2 800
326 pages
Uncontrolled Rectifier
No ratings yet
Uncontrolled Rectifier
18 pages
Unidrive User Guide Iss9
No ratings yet
Unidrive User Guide Iss9
208 pages
MidaCrochet PSYDUCK CAPTAIN
100% (1)
MidaCrochet PSYDUCK CAPTAIN
15 pages
3.5rd Generation Operation Manual HW-2014 V6 2015-7-15
No ratings yet
3.5rd Generation Operation Manual HW-2014 V6 2015-7-15
104 pages
BC-4000 Service Manual
100% (1)
BC-4000 Service Manual
138 pages
Auditing Theory 2013
No ratings yet
Auditing Theory 2013
28 pages
Bulletin168bmet W
No ratings yet
Bulletin168bmet W
43 pages
@Weigh-BW BWS CW VW-technicalmanual
No ratings yet
@Weigh-BW BWS CW VW-technicalmanual
24 pages
Biz 910013000
No ratings yet
Biz 910013000
81 pages
Aclas LS2 User Manual Espanol
No ratings yet
Aclas LS2 User Manual Espanol
52 pages
Ucontrol: PXDM6..80
No ratings yet
Ucontrol: PXDM6..80
83 pages
Operation Manual: Model
No ratings yet
Operation Manual: Model
147 pages
VetcoGray S-Series SVXT
No ratings yet
VetcoGray S-Series SVXT
2 pages
SCA10 Programming Manual
No ratings yet
SCA10 Programming Manual
52 pages
CAS DBI User Manual
No ratings yet
CAS DBI User Manual
29 pages
SOEHNLE Handbook-3035
No ratings yet
SOEHNLE Handbook-3035
260 pages
XK3101 (HL-2065) Indicator
100% (1)
XK3101 (HL-2065) Indicator
20 pages
Right Side Seminar7october2018 Final
No ratings yet
Right Side Seminar7october2018 Final
73 pages
Manual Bateria 10kwh
No ratings yet
Manual Bateria 10kwh
42 pages
Zrzut Ekranu 2024-07-31 o 17.51.25
No ratings yet
Zrzut Ekranu 2024-07-31 o 17.51.25
35 pages
KH341A.ty1.F01M.factory Manual - Washer Extractor.V100B0
No ratings yet
KH341A.ty1.F01M.factory Manual - Washer Extractor.V100B0
3 pages
Mettler-Toledo Garvens X-Series System Manual
0% (1)
Mettler-Toledo Garvens X-Series System Manual
20 pages
Developing Skills Speaking, Listening, Writing and Reading.
No ratings yet
Developing Skills Speaking, Listening, Writing and Reading.
12 pages
User's Manual of Weighing Controller
No ratings yet
User's Manual of Weighing Controller
7 pages
Seismic Fragility of Transportation Lifeline Piers in The Philippines, Under Confinement and Shear Failure.
No ratings yet
Seismic Fragility of Transportation Lifeline Piers in The Philippines, Under Confinement and Shear Failure.
20 pages
W100 Manual en
No ratings yet
W100 Manual en
44 pages
Cân DIGI DI 166SS
No ratings yet
Cân DIGI DI 166SS
11 pages
Bizerba CS 300 para Cajas
No ratings yet
Bizerba CS 300 para Cajas
103 pages
Acontrol: Pxet6Q / Pxet10Q
No ratings yet
Acontrol: Pxet6Q / Pxet10Q
32 pages
It3000e Ex222 The
No ratings yet
It3000e Ex222 The
128 pages
Supply Chain Improvement in Construction Industry
No ratings yet
Supply Chain Improvement in Construction Industry
8 pages
Edu 402 Quiz Solved: Brutal Facts
No ratings yet
Edu 402 Quiz Solved: Brutal Facts
7 pages
Belt Conveyors For Bulk Materials Conveyor: Traducir Esta Página
No ratings yet
Belt Conveyors For Bulk Materials Conveyor: Traducir Esta Página
4 pages
Orlan Suit Introduction
No ratings yet
Orlan Suit Introduction
20 pages
Chapter One: Organizations and Organization Theory
No ratings yet
Chapter One: Organizations and Organization Theory
12 pages
03 EWK3010 Description
No ratings yet
03 EWK3010 Description
3 pages
How To Write A Research Proposal
No ratings yet
How To Write A Research Proposal
3 pages
Adult Weighing Scale ADE M20610 USer
No ratings yet
Adult Weighing Scale ADE M20610 USer
8 pages
After You Graduate You Get A Job in A Small
No ratings yet
After You Graduate You Get A Job in A Small
2 pages
Usg Plasters Hydrocal Gypsum Cements Sealers Parting Compounds Brochure en IG515
No ratings yet
Usg Plasters Hydrocal Gypsum Cements Sealers Parting Compounds Brochure en IG515
2 pages
LTP1245 Technical Reference
No ratings yet
LTP1245 Technical Reference
74 pages
Stats 101 Assignment 1
No ratings yet
Stats 101 Assignment 1
9 pages
Loma As Series Checkweigher User Manual
No ratings yet
Loma As Series Checkweigher User Manual
220 pages
Tutorial Benzene and Phenol
No ratings yet
Tutorial Benzene and Phenol
4 pages
BPA121 Eng
No ratings yet
BPA121 Eng
14 pages
SLG 425I Operating Instructions Safety Light Grid
No ratings yet
SLG 425I Operating Instructions Safety Light Grid
18 pages
DVP06XA-S Mixed Analog Input-Output Module
No ratings yet
DVP06XA-S Mixed Analog Input-Output Module
2 pages
Corex Delivery
No ratings yet
Corex Delivery
37 pages
01 Bio Cell 2024
No ratings yet
01 Bio Cell 2024
28 pages
Annexure-I For Gem Bid No:Gem/2021/B/1451378 Dated: 19-08-2021
No ratings yet
Annexure-I For Gem Bid No:Gem/2021/B/1451378 Dated: 19-08-2021
15 pages
Calibration Scale Unline Jce 30K
No ratings yet
Calibration Scale Unline Jce 30K
18 pages
Vector Vi-101
No ratings yet
Vector Vi-101
12 pages
APP 100 ZM201 Checkweigher
No ratings yet
APP 100 ZM201 Checkweigher
3 pages
Manual-FLYNET50 EN PDF
No ratings yet
Manual-FLYNET50 EN PDF
132 pages
The Nearest Neighbour Algorithm
No ratings yet
The Nearest Neighbour Algorithm
3 pages
Meaning of The Term Childhood As The Happiest Period of Life
No ratings yet
Meaning of The Term Childhood As The Happiest Period of Life
2 pages
EDU431 Mega For Final Term Obj+Subj All in 1 File by Everblue August2023
No ratings yet
EDU431 Mega For Final Term Obj+Subj All in 1 File by Everblue August2023
193 pages
Raspberry Pi Factsheet
No ratings yet
Raspberry Pi Factsheet
9 pages
Biosignal Processing Final Exam Updated
No ratings yet
Biosignal Processing Final Exam Updated
3 pages
Diagrama E Honda Civid Hybrid 2009
No ratings yet
Diagrama E Honda Civid Hybrid 2009
1 page
t6 User Manual
No ratings yet
t6 User Manual
3 pages
User Manual Ocs-Xz Electronic Hanging Scale
No ratings yet
User Manual Ocs-Xz Electronic Hanging Scale
10 pages
Theo Notes
No ratings yet
Theo Notes
5 pages
Systec It6000
0% (2)
Systec It6000
4 pages
Pantalla MTA 100
No ratings yet
Pantalla MTA 100
84 pages
XK315A1PC Manual
No ratings yet
XK315A1PC Manual
8 pages
GST 9600R
No ratings yet
GST 9600R
3 pages
XK315A1W Manual
No ratings yet
XK315A1W Manual
9 pages
User Manual Weight Indicator 3016 PDF
No ratings yet
User Manual Weight Indicator 3016 PDF
9 pages